Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Safety User Manual

BMW-Logo

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Safety

BMW-2-Series-2023

Safety

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems and functions that are available  now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle. Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Airbags

  1. Front airbag, driver
  2. Front airbag, front passenger
  3. Head airbag
    Front airbags
    Front airbags help protect the driver and the front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which seat belts alone would not pro-vide adequate protection.
  4. Side airbag
  5.  Knee airbag
    Side airbag
    In the event of a side collision, the side airbag protects the side of the body in the chest and lap area.
    In the event of a side collision, the side airbag in the rear protects the chest and lap area on the side of the bodies of the occupants in the outer rear seats.

Head airbag
In Head airbage event of a side collision, the head airbag protects the head.

Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants through side windows during rollovers or side collision events.

Knee airbag
Depending on the national-market version:
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of a frontal impact.

Protective effect

General information
Airbags are not deployed in every impact situation, e.g., in less severe accidents.
Information on optimum protective effect of the airbags

Warning
If the seat position is incorrect or the deployment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag system cannot provide protection as intended and may cause additional injuries due to deployment. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Follow the information on achieving the optimum protective effect of the airbag system.

  • Keep a distance from the airbags.
    Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the 3 o’clock and 9 o’clock positions to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is deployed.
    Adjust seat and steering wheel so that hands can be crossed over the steering wheel. Select the settings so that the shoulder rests against the backrest when crossing the hands and the upper body is as far back as possible while still maintaining a comfortable grip on the steering wheel.
  • Make sure that the front passenger is sit-ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell and does not support them on the dashboard.
  • Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag.
  • There should be no additional persons, animals or objects between an airbag and a person.
  • Dashboard and windshield on the passenger’s side must stay clear – do not at-tach adhesive film or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, for instance for navigation devices or mobile phones.
  • Do not bond the airbag cover panels with adhesive, do not cover them or modify them in any way .Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the passenger’s side as a storage area. Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or other objects to the front seats that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated airbag versions.
  • Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.
    Never modify either the individual components or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
    Do not disassemble the airbag system.

Warning
Individual components can be hot after deployment of the airbag system. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch individual components.

Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to failure, malfunction or unintentional deployment of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the airbag system might not deploy as intended despite the accident severity. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the airbag system checked, repaired, disassembled and scrapped by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Display in the instrument cluster

When drive-ready state is turned on, the warning light in the instrument cluster lights up briefly, thereby indicating the operational readiness of the entire air-bag system and the seat belt tensioners.

Malfunction

  • Warning light does not come on when drive-ready state is turned on.
    The warning light lights up continuously.
  • Have the system checked.
    Setting the front seat positions
    The power that deploys the driver’s/front passenger airbags depends on the position of the driver’s/front passenger seat.
  • To maintain the accuracy of this function, calibrate the electrical front seats as soon as a respective message appears on the control display.
  • Additional information: Seats, refer to page 92.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags

Principle
The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body’s resistance.
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger’s side are activated or deactivated.

General information
Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, refer to the safety information and instructions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children.

Safety information

Warning
To ensure the front passenger airbag function, the system must be able to detect whether a person is sitting in the front passenger seat. The entire seat surface must be used for this purpose. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell.

Functional requirements
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied seat surface:

  • Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically determined to be safe for use on the front passenger seat.
    Do not place objects under the seat that can press against the seat from below.
    Do not place any electronic devices on the front passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it.
    No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator light for the front passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbag in the headliner indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
The light indicates whether the airbags are either activated or deactivated.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light shortly lights up and then indicates whether the airbags are either activated or deactivated.

  • The indicator light lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint system or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the passenger’s side are not activated.

  • The indicator light does not light up when, for instance, a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the passenger’s side are activated.

Fault of the automatic deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults, the front passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain seat positions. In this case, the indicator light for the front passenger airbags lights up.
In this case, change the seat position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear seat.

Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children seated in a child restraint system, particularly in child restraint systems required by NHTSA at the point in time when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child restraint system, make sure that the indicator light for the front passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child restraint system has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not activated.

Collision warning systems

General information
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has different systems that can help prevent an imminent collision.

  • Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 159.
    Lane departure warning, refer to page 164.
  • Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to page 167.
    Rear-end collision preparation, refer to page 169.

Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or responses, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Turning on/turning off collision warning systems

Depending on national-market version, some of the systems are automatically activated whenever you start driving.
The following functions are adjustable.

  1. “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Safety and warnings”
  6. Select the desired settings.

Resetting the settings
The settings of the collision warning systems can be reset to the default settings at vehicle delivery.

  1. “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5.  “Safety and warnings”
  6.  “Reset to recommended settings”

System limits

Safety information

Warning
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or it may react too late or in a manner that is not consistent with normal use. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner’s Manual regarding the scope of the system’s operation and limitations.

Detection capability

The system’s detection capability is limited.
Objects are only considered if they are within the detection range of the installed sensors and are detected by the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.
Thus, a system response might not come or might come late.

System limits of the sensors

Additional information:

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.

Forward Collision Mitigation

Principle
The Forward Collision Mitigation can help prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be avoided, the system may help reduce the se-verity of the accident.
The system can issue a warning of a possible risk of collision and activate the brakes independently, if needed.

General information
Depending on the equipment version, the Forward Collision Mitigation system includes the following functions:

Forward Collision Warning with light braking function, refer to page 162.
Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Mitigation, refer to page 163.

Safety information

Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or responses, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning
Individual functions may not work correctly when towing with Front Collision Warning en-abled or Cruise Control switched on. There is a risk of accident. Switch off Front Collision Warning and Cruise Control before towing.

Sensors
Depending on the equipment, the system is controlled by the following sensors:

  • Camera behind the windshield.
    Front radar sensor.

Speed range

The system issues a warning of a possible risk of collision at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated temporarily.
Some functions are deactivated earlier.
The system is enabled as soon as the speed drops below these values again.

Turning the Forward Collision Mitigation on/off

Turning on the system automatically
Depending on the national-market version, the system is automatically active after every departure.

Turning on system manually
The system is activated by setting the warning time.

Additional information:
Setting the warning time, refer to page 160.
Turning system off manually
Depending on national-market version, the adjustment can only be made when the vehicle is at a standstill or in a very low speed range.
If necessary, the switch-off must be confirmed successively on the Control Display.

  1. “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Safety and warnings”
  6.  “Forward Collision Mitigation”
  7.  “Off”

Setting the warning time

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Safety and warnings”
  6. “Forward Collision Mitigation”
  7. Select the desired setting.
    • “Early”
    • “Medium”
    • “Late”: only acute warnings are displayed.

The more sensitive the warning time is set to be, the more warnings will be displayed. Therefore, there may also be an excess of un-warranted warnings and responses.
Turning the warning signal on/off
System warning signals can be turned off, de-pending on vehicle equipment.

  1. “MENU”
    “Vehicle apps”
  2. “Driving settings”
  3. “Driver Assistance”
  4. “Safety and warnings”
  5.  “Forward Collision Mitigation”
  6. “Warning tone”

Display in the instrument cluster
The following icons are shown on the instrument cluster and, depending on vehicle equipment, on the Head-up Display:

Icon Meaning

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version:
Icon illuminates yellow: function restriction detected, e.g., due to low sun or because the system has failed. You may continue driving. If necessary, follow the instructions from Check Control messages.

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version:
Icon illuminates yellow: the system is turned off.

Risk of collision, for instance with a person.

Risk of collision, for instance with a preceding vehicle.

General risk of collision.

The image of the respective icon may vary be-cause the system may detect multiple objects.

Warning function
The Forward Collision Mitigation warns on different warning levels, depending on the respective hazardous situation.

In the event of a system warning, the driver must intervene immediately and in accordance with the situation.

  • A red icon lights up:
    A hazardous situation has been detected. Increased awareness is required.
  • A red icon flashes:
    There is a risk of collision. Intervene immediately.
  • A warning signal sounds:
    There is a risk of collision. Intervene immediately.
  • Automatic brake intervention:
    Depending on the equipment and situation in case of an imminent danger of collision, the system can also intervene with an auto-matic brake intervention and automatically decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a complete stop.

When the brake pedal is pressed quickly and hard, the maximum braking force of the vehicle is used.

Automatic brake intervention
In case of a risk of collision, the system can assist with an automatic brake intervention, if necessary.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
A brake intervention can be canceled by step-ping on the accelerator pedal with sufficient force, releasing the brake pedal, or by actively steering.
City brake function: the brake intervention oc-curs to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.
With radar sensor: the brake intervention oc-curs to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, only a brief brake intervention will occur.

System limits

Safety information

Warning
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or it may react too late or in a manner that is not consistent with normal use. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner’s Manual regarding the scope of the system’s operation and limitations.

Detection capability

The system’s detection capability is limited.
Objects are only considered if they are within the detection range of the installed sensors and are detected by the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.
Thus, a system response might not come or might come late.

System limits of the sensors

Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.

Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following situations:

  • In tight curves.
    With limitation of the driving stability control systems.
    Up to 10 seconds after drive readiness is switched on via the Start/Stop button.

Approach control warning with light braking function

Principle
The Approach control warning with light braking function warns of a possible risk of collision and may brake independently.
In the event of an accident, the system may reduce impact speed.

General information

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their detection range.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings may vary with the current driving situation.
The system considers the driver’s vehicle handling when responding. If an active driving style is detected, warnings and brake interventions occur less frequently.

Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-ward Collision Mitigation”.

Display in the instrument cluster
A warning icon is displayed when a collision with a detected vehicle is imminent.

Icon Meaning

Forward Collision Warning with a detected vehicle.

General risk of collision.

Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene. Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 159.

System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the “Forward Collision Mitigation” chapter.

Detection range
The following situations may not be detected, or only detected with a delay, for instance:

  • Vehicle driving slowly in front and being approached at high speed.
    Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
    Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
    Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated temporarily. When the vehicle slows down to below this speed, the system is reactivated.

Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation

Principle
At speeds that are common in towns and cities, the Pedestrian Warning with City Brake function warns the driver of a possible risk of collision with pedestrians and cyclists, and brakes automatically if necessary.
In the event of an accident, the system may reduce impact speed.
General information

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their detection range.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk of collision with pedestrians at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.

Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter For-ward Collision Mitigation.

Display in the instrument cluster
A warning icon is displayed when a collision with a detected pedestrian is imminent.

Icon Meaning

Risk of collision with a pedestrian.

General risk of collision.

Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene. Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 159.

System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the “Forward Collision Mitigation” chapter.

Detection range

The detection range in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas:

  •  Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle.
    Extended area, arrows 2, to the right and left of the central area.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located within the central area. A warning is is-sued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.
The following situations may not be detected, for instance:

Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.
Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of their contour or posture.
Pedestrians with insufficient height.

Upper speed limit

Depending on vehicle equipment, the system responds to pedestrians when the vehicle peed is below 50 mph/80 km/h.

Lane Departure Warning

Principle
The lane departure warning alerts when the vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the lane.

General information

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their detection range.
The system issues a warning starting at a minimum speed. The minimum speed is country-specific and displayed on the control display.
Warnings are displayed in the instrument cluster. In addition, the steering wheel vibrates.
The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set in the respective direction be-fore exiting the lane.

Safety information

Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing road and traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in response to a warning.

Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or responses, or these may be is-sued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Functional requirement
The camera must detect the lane boundaries for the lane departure warning to be active.
Sensors
The system is controlled by a camera behind the windshield.

Turning the Lane Departure Warning on/off

Turning on the system automatically
Depending on the national-market version, the system is automatically active after every departure.

Turning on system manually
The system is activated by setting the warning time.

Additional information:
Setting the warning time, refer to page 165.

Turning system off manually
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, you must successively confirm the switch-off on the Control Display.

  1. MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Safety and warnings”
  6. “Lane Departure Warning”
  7. “Off”

Setting Lane Departure Warning Setting the warning time

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Safety and warnings”
  6. “Lane Departure Warning”
  7. Select the desired setting.
    • “Early”
    • “Medium”
    • “Reduced”
      Some warnings are suppressed de-pending on the situation, for instance when purposely driving over pathway lines in curves or with dynamic passing without a turn signal.

Setting the intensity of the steering wheel vibration

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Driving settings”
  4.  “Driver Assistance”
  5.  “Feedback via steering wheel”
  6.  “Vibration intensity”
  7. Select the desired setting.

The setting is applied to all collision warning systems.
Depending on the national-market version: turning steering intervention on/off

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Driving settings”
  4.  “Driver Assistance”
  5.  “Safety and warnings”
  6. “Lane Departure Warning”
  7. “Steering intervention”

Depending on the national-market version, the steering intervention is automatically active after every driving off.

Display in the instrument cluster
Different system statuses are displayed on the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version.

Icon Meaning

The icon is illuminated green: the system is turned on. A lane boundary has been detected on at least one side of the vehicle and the system is ready to intervene. Warnings will be issued.
Icon flashes green: the system is per-forming a steering intervention.

Warning function
If you leave the lane
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in accordance with the steering wheel vibration setting.
When the turn signal is switched on in the corresponding direction before changing the lane, a warning is not issued.

Steering intervention
Depending on the equipment and the national-market version: if a lane marking is crossed in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the system intervenes with a brief active steer-ing intervention in addition to vibrating. The system thus helps keep the vehicle in the lane. The steering intervention can be noticed on the steering wheel and can be manually over-ridden at any time. During an active steering intervention, the display in the instrument clus-ter will blink.
For instance, the steering intervention will be suppressed in the following situations:

  • With hard accelerating or braking.
    When blinking.
    With hazard warning system switched on.
    In driving situation with high driving dynamic

Warning signal
Depending on the national-market version: in the event of multiple active steering interventions by the system within 3 minutes with-out the driver’s intervention at the steering wheel during the steering intervention itself, an acoustic warning will sound. A short warning signal will sound at the second steering intervention. Beginning with the third steering intervention, a continuous warning will sound.
In addition, a Check Control message is displayed.
The warning signal and Check Control message advise to pay closer attention to the lane.

End of warning
For instance, the warning or an active steering intervention will be canceled in the following situations:

  • Automatically after a few seconds.
    When returning to your own lane.
    With hard accelerating or braking.
    With hazard warning system switched on.
    When blinking.
    While Dynamic Stability Control is adjusting or is disabled.
    Immediately following a steering intervention by the vehicle systems.
    With manual steering intervention.
    When another driver assistance system is activated, if applicable.
    Lane boundaries are not detected.
    When the system limits are reached.

System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the “Collision warning systems” chapter.

Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following situations:

  • In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, merging, diverging, or multiple lane boundaries such as in construction areas.
  • With lane boundaries that are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water.
  • In tight corners or on narrow roads.
  • With lane boundaries that are covered by objects.
  • When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.
  • Up to 10 seconds after drive readiness is switched on via the Start/Stop button.
  • While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.

A Check Control message may be displayed when the system is limited. Depending on the national-market version, a yellow icon is also illuminated.

Active Blind Spot Detection

Principle
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from behind in the adjacent lane.
The light in the exterior mirror emits warnings at different steps.

General information

  • Radar sensors monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a minimum speed.
    The minimum speed is country-specific and displayed in the Active Blind Spot Detection menu.
    The system indicates whether there are vehicles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The light in the exterior mirror lights up dimly.
    Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal, the system issues a warning in the situations described above. The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.
    When turning at a speed of up to approx.
    12 mph/20 km/h, the steering wheel will not vibrate.
  • Safety information
    Follow the safety information in the “Forward Collision Mitigation” chapter.
  • Sensors
    The system is controlled by the following sensors:
  • Camera behind the windshield.
  • Radar sensors, side, rear.

Turning Active Blind Spot

Detection on/off

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5.  “Safety and warnings”
  6. “Active Blind Spot Detection”
  7. Select the desired setting.

Adjusting the Active Blind Spot Detection

Setting the warning time

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Safety and warnings”
  6. “Active Blind Spot Detection”
  7. Select the desired setting.

Setting the intensity of the steering wheel vibration

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4.  “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Feedback via steering wheel”
  6. “Vibration intensity”
  7. Select the desired setting.

The setting is applied to all collision warning systems.
Warning function

Light in the exterior mirror

  • The light in the exterior mirror warns of a possible collision.
  • Prewarning
    The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind.
  • Acute warning
    In case of an acute warning, the steering wheel briefly vibrates and the light in the exterior mirror blinks brightly.
    An acute warning is given when the following conditions are met:
  • Another vehicle is located in the critical area.
    Your own vehicle is approaching the other
  • Depending on the system setting when the turn signal is turned on.

The warning stops when the other vehicle has left the critical area or the turn signal has been turned off.

Flashing of the light
A flashing of the light in exterior mirror during vehicle unlocking serves as a system self-test.

System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the “Collision warning systems” chapter.

Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated temporarily.
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.

Displaying warnings
Depending on the selected warning settings, e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can be displayed. However, there may also be an excess of unwarranted warnings of critical situations.

Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following situations:

  • When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own.
    In tight corners or on narrow roads.
    The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered, for instance by stickers.

A Check Control message may be displayed when the system is limited. Depending on the national-market version, a yellow icon is also illuminated.

Rear-end collision preparation

Principle
Depending on the equipment and national-market version, the rear-end collision preparation can react to vehicles approaching from behind.

General information

Radar sensors monitor the area behind the vehicle.
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a certain speed, the system can react as follows:

  • Where applicable, the hazard warning flashers will be switched on.
    Where applicable, the PreCrash functions are triggered.
  • Safety information
    Follow the safety information in the “Forward Collision Mitigation” chapter.
  • Sensors
    The system is controlled by the radar sensors on the sides and rear.
  • Turning rear-end collision preparation on/off

  • The system is automatically active when the vehicle is turned on.
    The system is deactivated in the following situations:
  • When driving in reverse.
  • System limits
    General information
    Follow the system limits in the “Collision warning systems” chapter.
  • Functional limitations
    The system function may be limited in the following situations:
  • When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own.
    The speed of the approaching vehicle is very slow.

Cross traffic warning

Principle
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of perpendicular parking spaces, road users approaching from the side are detected sooner by the cross traffic warning than is possible from the driver’s seat.

General information

  • The area behind the vehicle is monitored by sensors.
    The system indicates approaching road users.
    Follow the information in the “Parking assistance systems” chapter.
  • Safety information
  • Warning
    The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Sensors
The system is controlled by the radar sensors on the sides at the rear.

Turning on/turning off the cross traffic warning manually

  1. “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Parking and maneuvering”
  6. “CROSS TRAFFIC WARNING”
  7. Select the desired setting.

Turning on the cross traffic warning automatically
If the system was activated on the control dis-play, it is automatically turned on as soon as the Park Distance Control or a camera view is active and a selector lever position is engaged.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is switched on.
Depending on the national-market version, the system is automatically active when the vehicle is started.

Turning off the cross traffic warning automatically
The system is automatically turned off in the following situations:

  • When the speed exceeds walking speed.
    When a certain distance covered is exceeded.

Warning function
General information
The respective display is called up on the Control Display. A signal tone may sound and the light in the exterior mirror may flash.

Visual warning

Light in the exterior mirror

  • The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehicles are detected by the rear sensors and your own vehicle is moving in reverse.
  • Display in the Park Distance Control view
  • In the Park Distance Control view, the respective boundary area flashes red if vehicles are detected by the sensors.
  • Depending on vehicle equipment: display in camera image

The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the camera image flashes red if vehicles are detected by the sensors.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your own vehicle.

Acoustic warning
In addition to the visual warning, a signal tone sounds if your own vehicle moves into the respective direction.
Depending on the national-market version, the signal tone will already sound when the gear position is engaged.

System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.

Functional limitations
The function can be limited, for instance in the following situations:

  • In tight curves.
    Crossing objects are moving at a very slow or a very fast speed.
    Other objects that hide cross traffic are in the capture range of the sensors.
  • Depending on vehicle equipment: display in camera image

The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the camera image flashes red if vehicles are detected by the sensors.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your own vehicle.

Acoustic warning
In addition to the visual warning, a signal tone sounds if your own vehicle moves into the respective direction.
Depending on the national-market version, the signal tone will already sound when the gear position is engaged.

System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Functional limitations
The function can be limited, for instance in the following situations:

  • In tight curves.
    Crossing objects are moving at a very slow or a very fast speed.
    Other objects that hide cross traffic are in the capture range of the sensors.

BMW Drive Recorder

Principle
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video recordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to document surrounding traffic.

General information
Video recordings can be saved in different ways:

  • Automatic storage of the recording. The function allows the documentation of the event of an accident.
    Manual storage of the recording.
    The function allows the documentation of traffic situations.

The assistance systems’ cameras are used to record, e.g., Panorama View.
Additionally, the following parameters are stored for the trip:

Date.
Time.
Vehicle speed.
Global Positioning System coordinates.

Data protection
The permissibility of recording and using video recordings is contingent upon the statutory regulations of the country in which the system is to be used. The user is responsible for the use of the system and compliance with respective applicable regulations.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends confirming there are no statutory or regulatory constraints on use of the system in your state or country prior to the initial use. In addition, the laws with respect to use of the system should be verified in regular intervals, especially when borders are frequently crossed.
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed about the system. In addition, information about the system is required when handing off the vehicle.

Functional requirements

  • Standby or drive readiness is switched on.
    BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
    Privacy Policy was accepted.
    Recording type was selected.
    Recording time was selected.

Activating/deactivating the BMW Drive Recorder

The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated before the first use of the recording function.

  1. “MENU”
  2. “All apps”
  3. “Drive Recorder”
  4. Accept Privacy Policy.
  5. “Settings”
  6.  “Allow recording”
  7.  Select the desired setting.

Recording functions

Automatic recording
Recordings are saved automatically when the vehicle sensors detect an accident.
The system saves recordings made up to 20 seconds before and after saving was triggered.

Manual recording

Using the button

  • Press and hold this button.
  • Via iDrive
    Start the recording:
  1. “MENU”
  2. “All apps”
  3.  “Drive Recorder”
  4. “Recording”
  5.  “Start recording”
  6. Recording can also be started by selecting the widget on the Control Display.
    The system saves recordings up to 20 seconds before and after storage is triggered

Recording playback and administration
Stored video recordings can be played back, exported and deleted.
For your own safety, the video recording is only displayed on the Control Display up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market versions, the video recording is only displayed if the parking brake is engaged or if the selector lever is in the P position.

  1. “MENU”
  2. “All apps”
  3. “Drive Recorder”
  4. “Recordings”
  5. Select desired recording.

If a camera change occurred during the recording, different segments of the video can be selected.

Settings
General information
Various settings can be applied.

Recording type

  1. “MENU”
  2. “All apps”
  3. Drive Recorder”
  4. Settings”
  5. Select the desired setting.

Recording time

  1. “MENU”
  2. “All apps”
  3.  “Drive Recorder”
  4. “Settings”
  5. Select the desired setting.

Cameras
Different cameras can be selected.

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “All apps”
  3.  “Drive Recorder”
  4.  “Settings”
  5. “Cam. selection”
  6. Select desired camera.

In case of an accident, the system switches automatically to “All” cameras.
If driver assistance systems are active, their camera views are selected automatically.

System limits
In the event of serious accidents, it may not be possible to store recordings if the damage to the vehicle is too great or the power supply was interrupted.

Active Protection

Principle
Active Protection prepares occupants and the vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving or collision situations.

General information
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, Active Protection consists of various PreCrash functions.
The system is used to detect certain critical driving situations that might lead to an accident. This includes the following critical driving situations:

  • Emergency braking.
    Severe understeering.
    Severe oversteering.

Certain functions of several systems can, within the system limits, lead to Active Protection triggering:

  • Forward Collision Warning with light braking function: automatic brake intervention.
    Front collision mitigation: Brake Assistant
    Rear-end collision preparation: detection of impending rear-end collisions.
  • Safety information
  • Warning
    The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system limits, critical situations might not be detected reliably or in time. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Function
Depending on vehicle equipment: In critical accident situations, the following individual functions become active as needed:

  • Automatic closing of the windows. The windows remain open with a small gap.
  • The glass sunroof/panoramic glass sunroof closes automatically. The sun protection is also closed.
    Automatic Positioning of the backrest for the front passenger seat.

Systems can be returned to the desired set-tings following a critical driving situation with-out accident.

PostCrash – iBrake

Principle
In certain accident situations, the PostCrash iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a standstill without intervention by the driver.

General information
The PostCrash iBrake can reduce the risk of a further collision and its consequences.

At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released automatically.

Harder vehicle deceleration
In certain situations, it may be necessary to bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than automatic braking allows.
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake. For a brief period, the brake pressure will be higher than the brake pressure that is achieved by the automatic braking function. Automatic brake actuation is interrupted.

Canceling automatic braking
It may be necessary to interrupt automatic braking in certain situations, for instance when making an evasive maneuver.

Cancel automatic braking:

  • By pressing the brake pedal.
    By pressing the accelerator pedal.

Fatigue alert

Principle
The Fatigue Alert can detect decreasing alert-ness or fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous trips, for instance on highways. The system recommends a break.
Safety information

Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing one’s physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not be detected in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.

Function
The system is switched on each time drive-ready state is switched on.
After starting the trip, the system is trained to the driver, so that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.

This procedure takes the following criteria into account:

  • Personal driving style, for instance steering behavior.
    Driving conditions, for instance time, length of trip.
  • Attention of the driver through the Driver Attention Camera.

Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can also display a break recommendation.

Break recommendation

Setting break recommendation
The fatigue alert is active automatically each time the drive-ready state is switched on and can thus display a break recommendation.
The break recommendation can also be switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive.

  1. “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4.  “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Safety and warnings”
  6. “Fatigue Alert”
  7. Select the desired setting.

Display
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Display with the recommendation to take a break.
During the display, various settings can be selected.
After a break, another break recommendation cannot be displayed until after approximately 45 minutes.
System limits
System functionality may be limited. If system functionality is limited, either no warning is is-sued or an incorrect warning is issued. The system function may be limited in the following situations:

  • When the time is set incorrectly.
    When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43 mph/70 km/h.
    With a sporty driving style, such as during rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
    In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently.
    When the road condition is poor.
    In the event of strong side winds.

The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a break during longer trips on highways.

Driver Attention Camera

Principle
Depending on the equipment, a camera in the instrument cluster monitors the driver activity or the driver’s direction of view.

General information
For support by assistance systems, the attention of the driver is analyzed by evaluating the head position and eye opening of the driver.
For full operability, make sure that the field of view of the Driver Attention Camera is not ob-structed.

Overview

Depending on the equipment, the instrument cluster has up to 3 infrared light sources. Depending on the light conditions, they can be visible when the vehicle is in standby mode.

System limits
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully functional in the following situations:

Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Dashboard User Manual

BMW-Logo

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Dashboard

The dashboard of the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe is a perfect example of the brand’s dedication to both luxury and speed. It is a masterful blend of sophistication and driver-centric design. The interior is made with high-quality materials and great attention to detail. The cabin is designed with the driver in mind, giving you a sense of purpose and control. The smooth, sweeping lines of the dashboard give the impression of space and modernity, while the iDrive interface and big touchscreen make the infotainment system easy to understand and use. This puts you in charge of all your technology. On the other hand, the digital driver’s screen has clear images and information that can be changed, so you can always see important information. The dashboard of the 2 Series Coupe not only makes driving more enjoyable, but it also goes well with the fast style of the car, making every trip a mix of style and excitement.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle. 

In the vicinity of the steering wheelBMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Dashboard (1)

  1. Power windows 
  2. Exterior mirror adjustment button Seating comfort features Memory function Central locking system
  3. Unlocking
  4. BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Dashboard (5)Locking
  5. Lights Light switch 
  6. Lights off Daytime driving lights 
  7. Parking light
  8. Automatic headlight control  Adaptive lighting functions Automatic High Beam Assistant 
  9. Low beams 
  10. Instrument lighting 
  11. Right roadside parking light 
  12. Left roadside parking light
  13. Pitman arm, left Turn signal
  14. High beams, headlight flasher
  15. Automatic High Beam Assistant
  16. Trip data meter 
  17. Shift paddles
  18. Steering wheel buttons, left
  19. Manual Speed Limiter
  20. Depending on the equipment
  21. Cruise Control on/off 
  22. Depending on the equipment: Active Cruise Control on/off 
  23. Cruise Control: store the speed Speed Limit Assistant: accept suggested speed
  24. Continuing cruise control
  25. Interrupting Cruise Control
  26. Active Cruise Control: increase distance
  27. Active Cruise Control: reduce distance
  28. Cruise Control rocker switch
  29. Instrument cluster
  30. Steering wheel buttons, right
  31. BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Dashboard 60Displaying menu bar in the instrument cluster
  32. Volume, 
  33. Voice activation system 
  34. Selecting menu contents in the instrument cluster 
  35. Changing the station/track, 
  36. For telephone, 
  37. Thumbwheel for selecting con-figuration menus for the instrument cluster and Head-up display 
  38. Using infotainment selection lists in the instrument cluster 
  39. Pitman arm, right
  40. Wipers 
  41. Rain sensor
  42. Cleaning the windshield 
  43. Horn, entire surface
  44. Steering wheel heating
  45.  Adjusting the steering wheel
  46. Unlocking the hood 
  47. Opening and closing cargo area
  48. Fold-out compartment 

In the vicinity of the centre console

  1.  Control Display
  2. Ventilation 
  3. Hazard warning system
  4. Climate control 
  5. Rear window defroster
  6. Defrost function
  7. Radio/multimedia, see Owner’s Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication 
  8. Adjusting the volume
  9. Station/title forward
  10. Station/title back
  11. 4 Button for glove compartment 
  12. Controller with buttons 
  13. Automatic Hold
  14. Parking brake
  15. Driving Dynamics Control 
  16. SPORT drive mode COMFORT drive mode
  17. ECO PRO drive mode
  18. Turning drive readiness on/off
  19. Auto Start/Stop function
  20. Parking assistance systems
  21. Panorama view
  22. Dynamic Stability Control
  23. Selector lever

In the vicinity of the headliner

  1. Emergency Call, SOS 
  2. Operating the electric glass sun-roof
  3. Indicator light, front passenger airbag
  4. Reading lights
  5. Interior lights 

FAQ

Q1: What type of dashboard does the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 have?

A1: The BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 typically features a modern and stylish dashboard design, with a combination of high-quality materials, intuitive controls, and advanced technology.

Q2: What materials are used on the dashboard of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023?

A2: The specific materials used on the dashboard of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 may vary depending on the trim level and optional packages chosen. Common materials include soft-touch surfaces, premium leather, brushed aluminium, and high-quality plastic.

Q3: Does the dashboard of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 have a digital instrument cluster?

A3: Yes, the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 is typically equipped with a digital instrument cluster, providing a customizable and high-resolution display of vehicle information such as speed, fuel level, and navigation instructions.

Q4: Are there physical buttons and knobs on the dashboard of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023?

A4: Yes, the dashboard of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 usually incorporates a combination of physical buttons and knobs for controlling various functions such as climate control, audio settings, and driving modes.

Q5: Does the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 have a touchscreen display on the dashboard?

A5: Yes, the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 typically features a centrally located touchscreen display on the dashboard. This display allows for easy access to infotainment features, navigation, and vehicle settings.

Q6: Are there ambient lighting options on the dashboard of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023?

A6: Yes, the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 may offer ambient lighting options on the dashboard. These lighting features can enhance the interior ambiance and allow for customization of colors and intensity.

Q7: Does the dashboard of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 have wireless charging capabilities?

A7: The availability of wireless charging capabilities on the dashboard of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 may depend on the specific trim level and optional packages chosen. Higher trim levels or certain packages may offer this feature.

Q8: Are there USB ports or other connectivity options on the dashboard of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023?

A8: Yes, the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 typically provides USB ports or other connectivity options on the dashboard. These allow for seamless integration of smartphones, music devices, and other compatible devices.

Q9: Does the dashboard of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 have a heads-up display?

A9: The BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 may offer a heads-up display as an optional feature. This display projects important information onto the windshield, allowing the driver to keep their eyes on the road while accessing vital data.

Q10: Are there driver-assistance features displayed on the dashboard of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023?

A10: Yes, the dashboard of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 typically displays driver-assistance features such as lane departure warning, blind-spot monitoring, and adaptive cruise control. These visual indicators provide real-time feedback and alerts to enhance safety.

Q11: Can the display on the dashboard of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 be customized?

A11: Yes, the display on the dashboard of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 is usually customizable. This allows the driver to configure and personalize the information and layout according to their preferences.

Q12: Does the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 have a heads-up display that shows navigation information?

A12: Yes, the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 may offer a heads-up display that shows navigation information. This feature allows the driver to view turn-by-turn directions without taking their eyes off the road.

Q13: Are there voice control options for the dashboard features in the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023?

A13: Yes, the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 typically offers voice control options for controlling various dashboard features. This allows for hands-free operation and enhanced convenience while driving.

Q14: Does the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 have a digital assistant integrated into the dashboard?

A14: The availability of a digital assistant integrated into the dashboard of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 may depend on the specific technology package or options chosen. Some models may offer voice-activated digital assistants for enhanced connectivity and convenience.

Q15: Can the display brightness on the dashboard of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 be adjusted?

A15: Yes, the display brightness on the dashboard of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 is typically adjustable. This allows the driver to customize the brightness level according to their preference and driving conditions.

Useful Link

View Full PDF: BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 User Manual
Download Manual: https://www.bmwusa.com/owners-manuals.html
2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

2023 BMW 2 SERIES COUPE Getting in and Set-up Guidelines

BMW-Logo

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Getting in

BMW-2-Series-2023

The 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe, which is a shining example of Bavarian handiwork, welcomes its passengers with a seamless mix of luxury and technology as soon as they step inside. As you approach this elegant car, it gives you hints about the high-tech ride you’re in for, whether it’s through the keyless entry, the door handles that light up, or the soft glow that comes from the cabin. When drivers get inside, they are greeted by an easy-to-use interior layout. Everything, from the electronically adjustable seats with a memory function to the driver-focused infotainment system, is designed to be set up in a way that is best for them. The combination of touch-sensitive screens and physical controls makes setting up the car to your liking both a physical and a digital pleasure. In sum, getting into and setting up the 2023 2 Series Coupe is a ceremony that combines tradition and innovation in a way that fits the BMW promise of “The Ultimate Driving Experience.”

2024 BMW 3 Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Getting in

Opening and closing

Vehicle keyBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-1

Buttons on the vehicle key.

Icon                         Meaning

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-2

 

Unlock

 

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-3

 

Lock. Remote Engine Start.

 

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-4

 

Unlock the trunk.

 

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-5

 

Panic mode, pathway lighting.

 

Access to vehicle interior

Unlocking with the vehicle key

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-2

 

Press the button on the vehicle key. Depending on the settings, either only the driver’s door or all vehicle access points are un-locked. If only the driver’s door is unlocked, press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points.

Locking with the vehicle key

  1.  Close the driver’s door.
  2. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-3 Press the button on the vehicle key. All vehicle access points are locked.

 

 

Buttons for the central locking system

OverviewBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-6

The central locking buttons are located on the front door.

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-7

 

Lock.

 

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-8

 

Unlock.

 

Locking the vehicle

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-9 Press the button with the front doors closed. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

 

Unlocking the vehicle

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-8

 

Press the button.

 

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-10

Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.

Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button

Access to the cargo area

Opening the cargo areaBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-11

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-4Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-ton on the outer side of the cargo area. Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second. Depending on the setting, the doors may be unlocked.

 

Closing the cargo area
Close the trunk manually.

Displays, control elements

In the vicinity of the steering wheelBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-13

  1.  Power windows
  2.  Central locking system
  3.  Seats, comfort features
  4.  Exterior mirrors
  5.  Opening/closing the trunk

Switch consoleBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-15

 

  1. Selector lever
  2.  Controller
  3.  Parking brake, Automatic Hold
  4.  Driving Dynamics Control
  5.  Start/Stop button
  6.  Assistance systems

BMW i Drive

Principle

BMW i Drive is the vehicle’s display and operating concept and includes a wide range of functions.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Call up the main menu.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-16

 

Call up the Media/Radio menu.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-17

 

Go to Phone menu.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-19

 

Call up the navigation map.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-20

 

Call up the destination input menu for navigation.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-21

 

Go to previous display range.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-22

 

Call up the Options menu.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-23

 

2024 BMW 3 Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant

Principle
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a personal assistant that enables natural voice operation of various vehicle functions.

Activating the voice control system

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-24Press the button on the steering wheel.

Say the command.

Canceling voice controlBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Getting-in-fig-24

 

  •  Press the button on the steering wheel again.
  •  ›Cancel‹
  •  Slide the Controller to the right or left.
  •  Press the Controller.

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Manually adjustable seats

BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (4)

  1. Longitudinal direction
  2. Thigh support
  3. Seat tilt
  4. Backrest width
  5. Lumbar support
  6. Height
  7.  Backrest tilt

Electrically adjustable seats 

BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (5)

  1. Backrest width
  2. Height/longitudinal direction/seat tilt 3 Head restraint/backrest tilt
  3. Lumbar support

Adjusting the head restraint

Adjusting the height: manual head restraints

BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (6)

  •  To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.
  • To raise: push the head restraint up.
  • After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Adjusting the height: M sport seat BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (7)

  • Press switch up or down.

Adjusting the distanceBMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (8)

  • ▷ Back: press the button and push the head restraint toward the rear.
    ▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the front.
    After setting the distance, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Adjusting distance: M sport seat
The distance to the back of the head is adjusted via the backrest inclination.

Adjusting the exterior mirrorsBMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (9)

Icon Meaning

  • BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (10)Fold the exterior mirror in and out.
  • BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (11)Adjust the exterior mirrors.
  • BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (12)Select mirror, Automatic Curb Moni-tor.

Adjusting the steering wheel

BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (13)

  1. Fold the lever down completely.
  2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands and move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seat position.
  3. Fold the lever back up.

Memory function

Principle
The following settings can be stored and, if necessary, retrieved using the memory function:

  •  Seat position.
  • Exterior mirror position.
  • Depending on the equipment: the height of the Head-up display.

Overview

BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (14)

The memory buttons are located on the front doors.

Storing settings

  1. BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (15)Set the desired position.
  2. Press the button. The LED lights up.
  3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is illuminated. A signal sounds.

Calling up settings
Press the desired button 1 or 2.

Entering the rear

Manual longitudinal setting
Fold the seat backrest forward

  1. Pull lever up to the stop.BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (16)
  2. Fold the seat backrest forward.
  3. Push the seat forward.

Push the seat backrest rearward

  1. Push the seat back into the initial position.
  2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.

Electric longitudinal setting

Fold the seat backrest forward

  1. Pull lever up to the stop.BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (17)
  2. Fold the seat backrest forward.
    To make the entry to the rear easier, the seat will automatically move to the most forward position.
    The process will be terminated when the switch for the forward/back direction adjustment is pressed or the backrest is reclined.
    Push the seat backrest rearward
    Push the seat backrest rearward and lock it.
    The seat moves automatically to the last seat position that was stored.

Infotainment

Navigation destination input

  1. “NAV”
  2.  “Destination input”
  3.  To enter a new destination or start guidance, tap on the search box or select entry from the search history.
  4. Enter at least two characters.
    If necessary, start search for point of interest categories from the points of interest menu.
    If necessary, accept the suggested search keywords.
  5. A list of the results is displayed.
  6. Select the desired entry.

Entertainment
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, the following buttons are installed in the center console.

Button Function

  • BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (18)Turn the button to adjust the volume.
    Press the button to switch off the sound output. Pressing the button again restores the previous volume setting.
  • BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (19)Change the entertainment source.
  • BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (20)Press once: changes the station/track.
  • BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (1)Press and hold: fast forward/rewind the track.

2024 BMW 3 Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Using the mobile phone

General information
After the mobile phone is connected once to the vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using iDrive and the steering wheel buttons.
Activate Bluetooth® on the mobile phone.

Connecting via Bluetooth® 

  1. “MENU”
  2.  “All apps”
  3. “Mobile devices”
  4.  “Connect new device”
    Mobile phones in range are displayed on the control display.
  5. Select the desired mobile phone.
  6. Compare the control number displayed on the control display with the control number in the display of the mobile phone, and confirm that they match.
  7. If necessary, select the connection mode: “Use Bluetooth”
    The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

Accepting a call
Depending on the equipment, incoming calls can be answered in several ways.

  • Via iDrive:
  • BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (3)“Accept”
  • BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (2)Press the button on the steering wheel.
  • Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to select from the list in the instrument cluster: “Accept”

Dialing a number

  1.  “TEL”
  2. “More”
  3. “Dial number”
  4. Enter the numbers.
  5. BMW-2 SERIES-COUPE-2023-Set-up-and-use- (3)Select the icon. The connection is established via the mobile phone to which this function has been assigned.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

FAQ

Does the BMW 2 Series Coupe offer keyless entry?

Yes, the 2 Series Coupe often comes equipped with Comfort Access, allowing keyless entry and start.

Can the driver’s seat settings be saved and recalled?

Indeed, many luxury vehicles like the 2 Series Coupe feature memory settings for the driver’s seat, allowing multiple drivers to recall their preferred seating positions.

How can I sync my smartphone with the car’s infotainment system?

The 2 Series Coupe typically supports smartphone integration via Apple CarPlay, Android Auto, or BMW’s own interface, accessible through the infotainment settings.

Is there an option for ambient interior lighting?

Yes, higher trims of the 2 Series Coupe may feature customizable ambient lighting to enhance cabin aesthetics.

How do I adjust the steering wheel position?

The steering wheel position can often be adjusted using either manual levers or electronic controls, depending on the trim level.

Does the vehicle support wireless charging for smartphones?

Many modern BMW models, including the 2 Series Coupe, offer a wireless charging pad as an optional or standard feature, depending on the configuration.

How can I set up voice command activation?

The car’s infotainment system generally includes voice command setup, allowing personalization and training to recognize the driver’s voice.

Can the mirrors fold automatically when the vehicle is locked?

Many BMW models feature auto-folding mirrors upon locking, providing both convenience and added security.

How do I activate and personalize the heads-up display (if equipped)?

Through the infotainment system or dedicated controls, drivers can adjust the HUD’s position, brightness, and information displayed.

Does the 2 Series Coupe come with a digital instrument cluster?

The BMW 2 Series Coupe is likely to feature a digital instrument cluster, offering various display modes and information.

How can I set the car to automatically lock when I start driving?

This feature, known as auto-lock, can typically be enabled through the vehicle’s settings menu.

Can the infotainment system support multiple user profiles?

BMW’s advanced infotainment systems often support multiple user profiles, allowing different drivers to save and recall their personalized settings.

How do I adjust the climate control settings upon entry?

The 2 Series Coupe features intuitive climate control dials or touch-sensitive controls, easily adjustable for driver and passenger comfort.

Can the car’s settings be controlled via a mobile app?

BMW often provides a dedicated mobile app that allows owners to control various vehicle settings, check status, and more.

How do I set up the sound system and save my favorite radio stations?

The infotainment system provides a user-friendly interface for audio settings, allowing drivers to tune, adjust sound preferences, and save favorite stations with ease.

Useful Link

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 User Manual
https://www.bmwusa.com/owners-manuals.html
2024 BMW 3 Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

2023 BMW 2 SERIES COUPE Engine Compartment And Maintenance

BMW-Logo

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Engine compartment And Maintenance

BMW-2-Series-2023

The BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 is a sports car that boasts a powerful engine and requires regular maintenance to keep it in top condition. The engine compartment is situated at the front of the vehicle and is easily accessible for routine maintenance. The 2.0-liter BMW TwinPower Turbo inline 4-cylinder engine generates up to 255 horsepower and 295 lb-ft of torque and is coupled with an 8-speed Sport Automatic transmission, which delivers smooth and efficient shifting. To maintain the engine of the 2 Series Coupe 2023, it is vital to adhere to the recommended maintenance schedule provided in the owner’s manual. This includes regular oil changes, air filter replacement, and spark plug replacement. Regular inspections of the belts, hoses, and other components are also necessary to ensure that they are in good working order. In addition to the engine, the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 necessitates regular maintenance of other components such as the brakes, suspension, and tires. This includes routine inspections of the brake pads and rotors, suspension components, and tire pressure and tread depth. It is also critical to have the wheels aligned and balanced periodically to ensure optimal handling and performance. Maintaining the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 on a regular basis is essential to keep the car performing at its best and to prolong its lifespan. Adhering to the recommended maintenance schedule and having the car inspected by a certified BMW technician can help ensure optimal performance and reliability.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems and functions that are available

Overview

now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle. Additional information:
Vehicle equipmentBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Engine-compartment-fig-4

  1. Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
  2. Oil filler neck
  3. Depending on motorization: coolant reservoir for additional radiator
  4. Coolant reservoir, engine
  5. Vehicle identification number
  6. Filler neck for washer fluid
  7. Jump-starting, negative battery terminal

Hood

Safety information

Warning
Improperly executed work in the engine com-partment can damage vehicle components and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Have work in the engine compartment performed by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Warning
The engine compartment accommodates moving components. Certain components in the engine compartment can also move with the vehicle switched off, for instance the radi-ator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

Warning
There are protruding parts, for instance lock-ing hooks, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.

Warning
An incorrectly locked hood can open while driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk of accident. Stop immediately and correctly close the hood.

Warning
Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of in-jury. Make sure that the area of movement of hood is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE
Folded-out wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

NOTICE
When the hood is closed, it must engage on both sides. Pressing again can damage the hood. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Open the hood again and then close it energetically. Avoid pressing again.

Opening hood

  1. Pull the lever, arrow 1. Hood is unlocked. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Engine-compartment-fig-2
  2. Release the lever and pull it again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened.
  3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.

Closing the hoodBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Engine-compartment-fig-3

Energetically close the hood from approx. 20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.

Maintenance & Vehicle Care

BMW-2-Series-2023

Operating materials

Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.

Additional information:
Vehicle equipment

Fuel recommendation

General information
Depending on the region, many filling stations sell fuel that has been customized to winter or summer conditions. Fuel that is available in winter, for instance helps make a cold start easier.

Gasoline

General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as containing metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refu-eling.
The power and consumption specifications re-fer to operating with RON 98 E10 fuel BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-

When using minimum quality fuel like RON 91 or fuel with an ethanol content of more than 10% to max. 25%, knocking noises may oc-cur and driving and acoustic performance may change. These have no effect on the engine service life.

Safety information

Caution
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Additionally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we recommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI number — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmfulengine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for additional maintenance.

NOTICE
Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel system and engine. Furthermore, the cat-alytic converter is permanently damaged. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not refuel or add the following in the case of gasoline engines:

  • Leaded gasoline.
  • Metallic additives, for instance manganese or iron.
    Do not press the Start/Stop button after refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact an authorized service center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

NOTICE
Fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality can compromise engine function or cause engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not fill with fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality.

NOTICE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and the engine. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not use fuels with a higher ethanol content than recommended. Do not refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to M100.

Recommended gas quality
BMW recommends AKI 91.

Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 87.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat-ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high external temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Engine oil

General information
The engine oil consumption and engine oil properties depend on the driving style and op-erating conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling by taking a detailed measure-ment.
The engine oil consumption can increase in the following situations, for instance:

  • Sporty driving style.
  • Break-in of the engine.
  • Idle operation of the engine.
  • With use of engine oil types that are classified as not suitable.

Different Check Control messages are shown on the control display depending on the engine oil level and engine oil properties.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have an authorized service center or an-other qualified service center or repair shop change the engine oil.

Safety information

NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level corrected by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

NOTICE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus engine damage. There is a risk of dam-age to property. It is recommended that you do not exceed the service intervals indicated in the vehicle.

Electronic oil measurement

General information
The electronic oil measurement has two measuring principles:

  • Monitoring.
  • Detailed measurement.

When making frequent short-distance trips or using a sporty driving style, for instance when cornering aggressively, regularly perform a de-tailed measurement.

Monitoring

Principle
The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and can be shown on the Control Display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed.

Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of normal driving.

Displaying the engine oil level

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Vehicle status”
  4. “Engine oil level”
    The engine oil level is displayed.

System limits
When making frequent short-distance trips or using a sporty driving style, it may not be possible to calculate a measured value. In this case, the measured value for the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Detailed measurement

Principle
The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle is stationary and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed.

General information
During the measurement, the idle speed is in-creased somewhat.

Functional requirements 

  • Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
  • The drive-ready state is switched on by pressing the Start/Stop button.
  • The engine is at operating temperature.
  • Selector lever in selector lever position N or P and accelerator pedal not depressed.

Performing a detailed measurement

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Vehicle status”
  4. “Engine oil level”
  5. “Oil level measurement”
  6. “Start measurement”

The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.

Adding engine oil

General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis-played in the instrument cluster. The top-up quantity is indicated in the message shown on the Control Display.
Only add suitable types of engine oil.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready state before adding engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Safety information 

Warning
Operating materials, for instance oils, greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Follow the instructions on the contain-ers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles.

Store operating materials out of reach of children.

NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level corrected by an authorized service center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

Overview

The oil filler neck is located in the engine compartment.
Additional information:
For an overview

Adding engine oil 

  1. Opening the hood.
    Opening
  2. Open the lid counterclockwise. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-fig-2
  3. Add engine oil.
  4. Close the lid.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Engine oil types to add

General information
The engine oil grade is critical for the service life of the engine.
Only add with the types of engine oil which are listed.

Safety information 

NOTICE
Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not use oil additives.

NOTICE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil specification.

Suitable engine oil types

Gasoline engine

  • BMW Longlife-12 FE.
  • BMW Longlife-17 FE+.

Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added:

Oil specification 

  • API SL.
  • API SM.
  • API SN.

Viscosity grades

  • SAE 0W-20.
  • SAE 0W-30.

More information about suitable oil specifications and viscosity grades of engine oils can be requested from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Coolant

General information
Coolant consists of water and coolant additive.
Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. The vehicle manufacturer recommends using coolant with the BMW LC-18 specification. Do not mix additives of different colors. Observe the water – additive mixture ratio of 50:50. Information about suit-able additives is available from an authorized service center or another qualified service cen-ter or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning
With the engine hot and the cooling system open, coolant can escape and lead to scald-ing. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down.

Warning
Additives are harmful and incorrect additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Do not allow additives to come into contact with skin, eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi-tives only.

Coolant level

General information
The coolant may be overfilled in the coolant reservoir when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The normal coolant level is achieved by operating the vehicle for a longer period.
The nominal coolant level is indicated by the maximum mark in the filler neck of the coolant reservoir.

Additional information:
For an overview

Checking the coolant level

  1. Let the engine cool down.
  2.  Opening the hood.
    Opening
  3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pres-sure to dissipate, then open it.
  4.  Open the coolant reservoir lid.
  5. The coolant level is correct when it is just below the maximum mark in the filler neck.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-fig-3
  6. Close the lid.

Adding coolant

  1. Let the engine cool down.
  2. Opening the hood.
    Opening
  3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pres-sure to dissipate, then open it.
  4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
  5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified fill level; do not overfill.
  6. Close the lid.
  7.  Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.

Disposal
BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-fig-4Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives.

Washer fluid

General information
All spray nozzles are supplied from one tank.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Safety information 

Warning
Some types of antifreeze can contain harmful substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard. Follow the instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent is recommended.

Warning
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con-tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Only add washer fluid when the engine is cooled down. Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on the windows can lead to damage to the wash-ing system. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not add silicon-containing additives to the washer fluid.

NOTICE
Mixing different windshield washer fluid concentrates or antifreeze can damage the washer system. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not mix different windshield washer fluid concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the information and mixture ratios provided on the containers.

OverviewBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-fig-5

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment.

Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer fluid concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to incorrect readings at temperatures be-low +5 ℉/-15 ℃.

Maintenance

Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.

Additional information:
Vehicle equipmen

BMW maintenance system

The maintenance system provides service notifications and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the maintenance system may vary according to the country version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated separately. Further information is available from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Condition Based Service

Principle
Condition Based Service determines the maintenance recommendation using sensors and special algorithms that take into account the operating conditions of the vehicle.
The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile.

General information
Information on service notifications can be dis-played on the control display.
Additional information:
Service notifications

Service data in the vehicle key
Information on the service notifications is continuously stored in the vehicle key. The service center can read this data out and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle key with which the vehicle was driven most recently.
Stationary periods
Stationary periods during which the vehicle battery was disconnected are not taken into account.
If this occurs, have an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/activated charcoal filter.

Maintenance Booklet for US Models

Please consult your Maintenance Booklet for additional information on the performance of service and maintenance work.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that maintenance and repair be performed by a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance and repair work should be retained.

Diagnostic socket

General information
Devices connected to the diagnostic socket will trigger the alarm system after locking the vehicle.
Remove devices connected to the diagnostic socket before locking the vehicle.

Safety information

NOTICE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intricate component intended to be used in conjunction with specialized equipment to check the vehicle’s primary emissions sys-tem. Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diagnosis, or contact with the socket for On-board Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates risks of personal and property dam-age. Given the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle strongly recommends that ac-cess to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to an authorized service center or an-other qualified service center or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for purposes of prop-erly utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagno-sis.

Position BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-fig-6

There is a diagnostic socket on the driver’s side for reading out vehicle data.

Emissions 

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-fig-7The warning light lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
  • The warning light flashes under certain circumstances:
    This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.
    Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Replacing components

Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-ment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment

Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard toolkit is located to the left of the trunk in the open compartment.

Wiper blades 

Safety information 

NOTICE
The window may sustain damage if the wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold in or switch on the wiper without a wiper blade installed.

NOTICE
Folded-out wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

Replacing the wiper blades

  1. To change the wiper blades, bring wipers into fold-out position.
    Fold-out position of the wipers
  2. Fold out and hold the wiper arm firmly.
  3. Squeeze the retaining spring, arrow 1, and fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-fig-8
  4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the detent.
  5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of removal until it locks in place.
  6. Fold in the wipers.

Lights and bulbs

General information
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution to driving safety.
All headlights and lights are designed using LED technology at least.
Some items of equipment use light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes are designated Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you let an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop perform the work in case of a malfunction.

Safety information

Warning
Intense brightness can irritate or damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not look directly into the headlights or other light sources. Do not remove the LED covers.

Headlight glass
The inside of the headlight glass can fog up in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the condensation evap-orates after a short time. The headlight glass does not need to be changed.
If, despite driving with the headlights switched on, moisture such as water droplets increas-ingly forms in the light, have the headlights checked.

Vehicle battery
General information
The battery is maintenance-free.
More information about the battery can be re-quested from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information 

DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injury or dan-ger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.

Warning
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Only vehicle batteries that are compatible with your vehicle type should be installed in your vehicle. Informa-tion on compatible vehicle batteries is availa-ble at an authorized service center.

Registering the battery to the vehicle
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you have an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has been changed. Once the bat-tery has been registered again, all comfort fea-tures will be available without limitation and any Check Control messages displayed which relate to comfort features will disappear.

Charging the battery

General information
Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life.

Safety information

NOTICE
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V electrical system. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the jump-start terminals in the engine compartment.

Charging the battery
Charge the battery only when the engine is off and via the jump-start terminals in the engine compartment.
With Mild Hybrid technology: charge the bat-tery only when the hood is opened.

Additional information:
Jump-start terminals

Power interruption
After a power interruption, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual set-tings updated, for example:

  • Parking brake
  • With Memory function: store the positions again.
  • Time: update.
  • Date: update.

Mild Hybrid technology

Principle
Part of the Mild Hybrid technology is a battery that works with a voltage of 48 volts. Mild Hybrid technology can lower the fuel consumption.

Safety information

DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injury or dan-ger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.

OverviewBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-fig-10

The battery for the Mild-Hybrid technology is located under a cover in the engine compart-ment on the front passenger side.

Removing the cover

  1. Turn lid up to the opened lock symbolBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-fig-11 arrow 1. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-fig-12
  2. Remove cover, arrow 2.
    Notice
    Do not exchange or work on the battery for the Mild Hybrid technology.

Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the filled battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses

General information
The fuses are located at different places in the vehicle.
Information on the fuse layout and the positions of the fuse boxes is available on the In-ternet: fusecard.bmw.com.

Safety information 

Warning
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload electrical lines and components. There is a risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rat-ing.

Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have an authorized service center or an-other qualified service center or repair shop re-place the fuses.

Breakdown Assistance

Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-ment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.

Additional information:
Vehicle equipment

Hazard warning system BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-fig-13

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-fig-14Hazard warning system button

The red light in the button blinks when the hazard warning system is turned on.

Warning triangle

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-fig-15

The warning triangle is located on the inside of the tailgate. Press on the release, arrow 1, and swivel the cover down, arrow 2.

First-aid kit

General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-tional-market version, the vehicle is equipped with a first-aid kit.
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg-ularly and replace any expired items promptly.

Storage
Storage for the first-aid kit is provided in the right side of the cargo area.

BMW Roadside Assistance

Principle
BMW Group Roadside Assistance can be con-tacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown.

General information
In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve-hicle’s condition is transmitted to the BMW Roadside Assistance.
There are various ways of contacting BMW Roadside Assistance.

  • Via a Check Control message. Supplementary text messages
  • Via a call with a mobile phone.
  • Via the BMW app.

Functional requirements

  • Active Connected Drive contract, equipment with intelligent emergency call or BMW Connected Drive services.
  • Cellular network reception.
  • Standby state is switched on.

Starting BMW Roadside Assistance manually
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, support is first offered through Teleservice Di-agnosis and, where applicable, then through Teleservice Help.

  1. “MENU”
  2. “All apps”
  3. “BMW Assistance”
  4.  Select the desired service.

A voice connection to the selected service is established.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnostics enables detailed vehi-cle data to be transmitted via cellular networks, which is necessary for vehicle diagnosis. This data is transmitted automatically. It may be necessary to approve this on the control dis-play.

Teleservice Help
Depending on the country, Teleservice Help enables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by BMW Roadside Assistance via wireless trans-mission.
You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it through BMW Roadside Assistance.

  1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
  2. Set the parking brake.
  3. Turn on control display.
  4. Consent to Teleservice Help.

BMW Accident Assistance

Principle
BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con-tacted if assistance is needed in the event of an accident.

General information
If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder-ately severe accident, which did not deploy any airbags, a Check Control message is displayed in the instrument cluster. In addition, a text message appears on the Control Display.
When BMW Accident Assistance is triggered, data on the vehicle’s condition is sent to BMW.

Functional requirements 

  • Active Connected Drive contract, equipment with intelligent emergency call or BMW ConnectedDrive services.
  • Cellular network reception.
  • Standby state is switched on.

Starting BMW Accident Assistance
If an accident is detected automatically
A text message relating to BMW Accident As-sistance appears on the control display.

The connection can be established directly:
“Contact accident assistance”
The Check Control message for BMW Accident Assistance can also be called up from the stored Check Control messages for a certain length of time.

Additional information:
Check Control

Starting BMW Accident Assistance manually
BMW Accident Assistance can also be con-tacted independently of the automatic accident detection function.

  1. MENU”
  2. All apps”
  3. BMW Assistance”
  4. If necessary, select the entry for BMW Acci-dent Assistance.
    Follow the displays on the control display. A voice connection is established.

Emergency Call

Intelligent emergency call
Principle
In case of an emergency, an emergency call can be triggered automatically by the system or manually.

General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-tional-market version, the vehicle is equipped with an Assist system.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
The Intelligent Assist system establishes a connection with the BMW Response Center.
For technical reasons, the emergency call can-not be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions.

OverviewBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-fig-16

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-fig-17SOS button

Functional requirements

  • Standby state is switched on.
  • The Assist system is functional.
  •  If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent emergency call: the integrated SIM card in the vehicle has been activated.

Automatic triggering
Under certain conditions, for example if the airbags are deployed, an emergency call is au-tomatically triggered immediately after an acci-dent of corresponding severity. Automatic Col-lision Notification is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

Manual triggering 

  1. Tap the cover flap.
  2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED in the area of the button illuminates green.
    • The LED is illuminated green when an emergency call has been initiated.
      If a cancel prompt appears on the control display, the emergency call can be aborted.
    • If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab-lished.
    • The LED flashes green when a connection to the BMW Response Center has been es-tablished.
      The BMW Response Center then makes contact with the occupants of the vehicle and initiates further steps to help.
      Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circumstan-ces.
      For this purpose, data that serves to deter-mine the necessary rescue measures, for instance the current position of the vehicle when it can be determined, is transmitted to the BMW Response Center.
      Even if the BMW Response Center is no longer heard through the loudspeakers, the BMW Response Center may still be able to hear the occupants of the vehicle.
      The BMW Response Center ends the emergency call.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Malfunction
The function of the emergency call may be impaired.
The LED near the SOS button flashes for approximately 30 seconds. A Check Control mes-sage is displayed.
Have it checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Jump-starting

General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles.

Safety information

DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injury or dan-ger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.

Warning
If the jumper cables are connected in the incorrect order, spark formation may occur. There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order during connection.

NOTICE
In the case of body contact between the two vehicles, a short circuit can occur dur-ing jump-starting. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that no body contact occurs.

Preparation

  1. Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage information can be found on the battery.
  2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
  3. Switch off any electrical components in both vehicles.

Jump-start terminals
The jump-start terminals are located in the en-gine compartment.

Additional information:
For an overview
Open the covers of the jump-start terminals.

Connecting the cables
Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary electronic systems/components, such as the radio, on the assisting and receiving vehicles.

  1. Open the lid of the jump-start terminal.
  2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive battery termi-nal, or to the corresponding jump-start ter-minal of the vehicle providing assistance.
  3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive battery terminal, or to the corresponding jump-start terminal of the vehicle to be started.
  4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative battery termi-nal, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle.
  5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative battery terminal, or to the corre-sponding engine or body ground of the ve-hicle to be started.

Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

  1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed.
    If the vehicle to be started has a diesel en-gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle run for approx. 10 minutes.
  2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way.
    If the first attempt to start the engine is not successful, wait a few minutes before mak-ing another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.
  3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
  4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order.
    Check the battery and recharge, if needed.

Tow-starting and towing

Safety information

Warning
Individual functions may not work correctly when towing with Front Collision Warning en-abled or Cruise Control switched on. There is a risk of accident. Switch off Front Collision Warning and Cruise Control before towing.

Steptronic transmission: Transporting the vehicle

General information
Do not transport the vehicle by towing it.

Safety information

NOTICE
The vehicle can be damaged when towing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.

NOTICE
The vehicle can become damaged when lift-ing and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage.

  • Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
  • Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.

Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the hazardous area, push it for a short distance at a speed of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h.

Additional information:
Rolling or pushing the vehicle

Tow truck BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-fig-18

The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.
Towing other vehicles

General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, de-pending on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden-tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear window.

Safety information 

Warning
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not be possible to control handling. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.

Warning
Different levels of braking may occur when towing with adaptive recuperation. There is a risk of accident. Deactivate adaptive recuper-ation before towing.

NOTICE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incorrectly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc-cur. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Correctly at-tach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.

Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles.
If it is impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an inclination, note the following:

  • Free movement is limited when cornering.
  • The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an inclination.

Tow rope
Observe the following notes when using the tow rope:

  • Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
  • Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when fastening.
  • Check the attachment of the tow fitting and tow rope in regular intervals.
  • Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.
  • Do not exceed a towing distance of 3 miles/5 km.
  • When driving off to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

Tow fitting

General informationBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Maintenance-&-Vehicle-Care-fig-19

The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle tool kit.
Observe the following notes when using the tow fitting:

  • Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle.
  • Turn the tow fitting at least 5 turns clockwise and screw it in as far as it will go. If necessary, tighten with a suitable object.
  • After use, unscrew the tow fitting counter-clockwise.
  • Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only.
  • Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
  • Check the attachment of the tow fitting in regular intervals.

Additional information:
Onboard vehicle tool kit

Safety information 

NOTICE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Follow the notes on using the tow fitting.

Screw thread for tow fitting

Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out.

Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Start the engine by jump-starting, if possible.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties corrected by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Additional information:
Jump-starting

Vehicle Care

Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.

Additional information:
Vehicle Equipment

Washing the vehicle 

General information
Regularly remove foreign bodies such as leaves or snow in the area below the wind shield.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense contamination and road salt can damage the vehicle.

Additional information:
Fold-out position of the wipers

Safety information 

NOTICE
When washing with an open fuel filler flap, damage may occur. There is a risk of dam-age to property, among other potential dam-age. Close the fuel filler flap before washing. Clean dirt behind the fuel filler flap with a cloth.

Steam cleaner and high-pressure cleaner
Safety information

NOTICE
When cleaning with high pressure cleaners, components can be damaged due to the pressure or temperatures being too high. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Maintain sufficient distance and do not spray too long continuously. Follow the operating instructions for the high pressure cleaners.

Distances and temperature 

  • Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
  • Minimum distance from sensors, cameras, seals and lights: 12 inches/30 cm.
  • Minimum distance from glass sunroof: 31.5 in/80 cm.

Automatic car washes or car washes

Safety information

NOTICE
Using a car wash with high pressure washers may result in water penetration of window areas. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not drive into high-pressure car wash systems.

NOTICE
Improper use of automatic car washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property, among other po-tential damage. Follow the following instruc-tions:

  • Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.
  • Do not drive through a car wash with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to the body.
  • Observe the tire width of the guide rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.
  • Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to the exterior mirrors.
  • Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain sensor to avoid damage to the win-dow wiper system.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Driving into a car wash

NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en-gaged when standby state is switched off. The wheels are blocked. There is a risk
of damage to property. Do not switch off standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g., in a car wash.

In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll freely.
Some car washes do not permit persons in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever position N. A signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Additional information:
Rolling or pushing the vehicle

Driving out of a car wash
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.
Turn on drive-ready state.
Additional information:
Drive-ready state

Lights
Do not rub wet lights dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents or cleaning agents containing alcohol.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance from insects, with auto shampoo and wash off with water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking effect can be reduced. The heat generated during braking dries brake disks and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the win-dows to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care

Vehicle care products
General information
BMW recommends using vehicle care and cleaning agents from BMW. Suitable vehicle care products are available from an authorized service center or another qualified service cen-ter or repair shop.

Vehicle paintwork

General information
Regular vehicle care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental in-fluences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural contaminants, such as tree resin or pollen, can affect the vehicle paintwork. Tailor the frequency and extent of your vehicle care to these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed immediately to prevent alterations or discolor-ations of the finish.

Matte paintwork
Only use cleaning and care products suitable for vehicles with matte paintwork.

Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to heavy abrasion and premature degradation of the leather surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, clean leather and provide leather care roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be-cause contamination on such surfaces is sub-stantially more visible. Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective coating of the leather surface.
Remove aggressive substances, e.g., sunscreen, immediately to prevent alterations or discolorations of the leather.

Synthetic leather care
Clean synthetic leather regularly with a damp microfiber cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, dust and road grime particles will rub into pores and folds, causing significant abrasion and premature degradation of the surface.
In case of major soiling, use a moist soft sponge or microfiber cloth with suitable interior cleaners.
Immediately remove aggressive substances, e.g., sunscreen, to prevent alterations or dis-colorations of the synthetic leather.

Fabric care

General information
In case of major contaminations, such as bev-erage stains, use a moist soft sponge or micro-fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaners.
Immediately remove aggressive substances, e.g., sunscreen, to prevent alterations or dis-colorations of the fabric.

Safety information

NOTICE
Open hook and loop fasteners on articles of clothing can damage the seat covers and other cloth upholstery in the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.

Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. Clean extensively down to the seams. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

Textile care
Use a microfiber cloth for cleaning minor con-tamination.
Dampen the cloth with water.

Caring for special components
Displays, operating elements, and protective glass of the Head-up display

NOTICE
Surfaces can be damaged by improper cleaning, e.g., by using chemical cleaners, or from moisture or liquid of any kind. Physical damage to the material is possible.

  • Avoid pressure that is too high and do not use any scratching materials.
  • Use a dry, clean antistatic microfiber cloth for cleaning displays.
  • Clean the operating elements and, de-pending on vehicle equipment, the pro-tective glass of the Head-up display with a damp microfiber cloth and standard household dish soap.

Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral rim cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam clean-ers above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective coating of adjacent components, such as the brake disk.
After cleaning, apply the brakes shortly to dry them. The heat generated during braking dries brake disks and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean Chrome surfaces, especially in case of exposure to road salt, with plenty of water and added auto shampoo as needed.

Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface contamination of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber care products at regular intervals. When clean-ing rubber seals, do not use any silicon-con-taining vehicle care products in order to avoid damage or noises.

Wiper blades
The wiper blades are cleaned by using the washer system.
Avoid cleaning the wiper blades manually, as this may reduce wiper performance.

Fine wood parts
Clean the fine wood veneer and fine wood components solely with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Kenaf
Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers using a suitable care product.

Plastic components 

NOTICE
Solvent cleaners that contain alcohol or sol-vents, such as lacquer thinners, cold cleaning agents, fuel and such, can damage plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed. Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed. Do not soak the headliner.

Seat belts

Warning
Chemical solvent cleaners can destroy the seat belt fabric. Missing protective effect of the seat belts. There is a risk of injury or dan-ger to life. Use only a mild soap solution for cleaning the seat belts.

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soap solution for cleaning the installed belt straps.
Seat belts should only be allowed to retract if they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

Warning
Objects in the driver’s footwell can limit the pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and can-not enter into the driver’s footwell. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning.

The floor mats can be removed from the interior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very contaminated, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the car-pet, rub back and forth in the driving direction only.

Trailer hitch with removable ball head
Keep ball and receptacle clean.
Regularly grease or oil bearings, sliding surfaces and the small balls on the holding pin with resin-free greases or oils.
Before using steam cleaners or high-pressure cleaners on the vehicle, remove the ball head and attach the cover to the receptacle.
Do not clean ball head with steam cleaner or high-pressure cleaner.

Sensors and camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent.

Taking the vehicle out of service
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must be taken. Further information is available from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Q&A

  1. What is the location of the engine compartment in the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023?
  • The engine compartment of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 is located in the front of the vehicle and is easily accessible for routine maintenance.
  1. What type of engine does the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 have?
  • The BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 has a 2.0-liter BMW TwinPower Turbo inline 4-cylinder engine.
  1. What is the horsepower and torque output of the engine of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023?
  • The engine of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 delivers up to 255 horsepower and 295 lb-ft of torque.
  1. What type of transmission does the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 have?
  • The BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 has an 8-speed Sport Automatic transmission.
  1. What maintenance schedule should be followed for the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023?
  • The recommended maintenance schedule for the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 is outlined in the owner’s manual.
  1. What are the recommended maintenance procedures for the engine of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023?
  • The recommended maintenance procedures for the engine of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 include regular oil changes, air filter replacement, and spark plug replacement.
  1. What other components of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 require regular maintenance?
  • Other components of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 that require regular maintenance include the brakes, suspension, and tires.
  1. How often should the brake pads and rotors of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 be inspected?
  • The brake pads and rotors of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 should be inspected regularly as part of the maintenance schedule.
  1. What is the importance of inspecting the belts and hoses of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023?
  • Regular inspection of the belts and hoses of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 is important to ensure they are in good condition and working properly.
  1. Why is it important to have the wheels of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 aligned and balanced periodically?
  • Having the wheels of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 aligned and balanced periodically is important to ensure proper handling and performance.
  1. Who should inspect and maintain the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023?
  • The BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 should be inspected and maintained by a certified BMW technician.
  1. How can regular maintenance of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 affect its performance and reliability?
  • Regular maintenance of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 can help ensure optimal performance and reliability, as well as prolong its lifespan.
  1. What is the recommended maintenance schedule for the suspension of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023?
  • The recommended maintenance schedule for the suspension of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 is outlined in the owner’s manual.
  1. How can tire pressure and tread depth affect the performance of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023?
  • Proper tire pressure and tread depth are important for optimal handling and performance of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023.
  1. Can regular maintenance of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 help prevent costly repairs?
  • Yes, regular maintenance of the BMW 2 Series Coupe 2023 can help prevent costly repairs by identifying potential issues before they become major problems.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Useful Link

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 User Manual
https://www.bmwusa.com/owners-manuals.html

Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

2023 BMW 2 SERIES COUPE Refueling Or Wheels And Tires

BMW-Logo

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Refueling Or Wheels and tires

BMW-2-Series-2023

The 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe is a great example of how performance and accurate engineering can work together. As a responsible owner, it’s important to take care of things like filling up the gas tank and making sure the tires are in good shape. When it’s time to fill up, using premium unleaded gasoline makes sure the engine works at its best, letting it reach its full potential. Proper tire care is just as important for keeping the car’s ride and driving in good shape. For the best performance and safety, you must regularly check and maintain tire pressure, choose the right tires for the conditions, and follow the suggested rotations and alignments. Together, these care and maintenance tips help the 2 Series Coupe keep giving drivers the thrilling ride and smooth performance that are the hallmarks of BMW engineering. 

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Refueling

Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.

Additional information:
Vehicle equipment

Follow the following when refueling

General information
Follow the fuel recommendation prior to refueling.
When refueling, hook the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the filler nozzle during refueling causes:

  • Premature switching off.
  • Reduced return of the fuel vapors.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly after refueling, otherwise the emissions warn-ing light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the filling station.

Additional information:
Fuel quality

Safety information

NOTICE
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Refuel promptly.

NOTICE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted surfaces may be damaged by con-tact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the en-vironment. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Avoid overfilling.

Fuel cap

Opening

  1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the  edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Refueling-Fig-1.
  2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Refueling-Fig-2
  3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Refueling-Fig-3

Closing

Warning
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jammed and crushed during closing. The cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel va-pors can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Pay attention that the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed when closing the cap.

  1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.
  2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.

Emergency unlocking
It may be necessary in certain situations to un-lock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance with an electrical malfunction. Have fuel filler flap unlocked by an authorized service center or another qualified service cen-ter or repair shop.

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-ment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.

Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Tire pressure

General information
The tire condition and tire pressure influence the following:

  • The service life of the tires.
  • Driving safety.
  • Driving comfort.
  • Fuel consumption.

Safety information

Warning
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pres-sure may heat up significantly and sustain damage. This will have a negative impact on aspects of handling, such as steering and braking response. There is a risk of accident. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it as needed, for instance twice a month and before a long trip.

Tire pressure specifications

In the tire inflation pressure table
The tire inflation pressure table contains all tire inflation pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres-sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following:

  • Tire sizes of your vehicle.
  • Maximum speed for driving.

On the control display
The current tire inflation pressure values and the intended tire inflation pressure values for the mounted tires can be displayed on the Control Display.
To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the tire sizes must be stored in the system and must have been set for the mounted tires.
The current tire inflation pressure value is lo-cated on each tire.
The reference tire inflation pressure value is located in the lower area of the control display.

Checking the tire pressure

General information
Tires heat up while driving. The tire pressure increases with the tire temperature.
Tires have a natural, consistent tire pressure loss.
The displays of inflation devices may be under-read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.

Checking using tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table 

  1. Determine the intended tire inflation pres-sure levels for the mounted tires.
  2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
  3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the ac-tual tire inflation pressure deviates from the intended tire inflation pressure.
  4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed onto the tire valves.

The tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold tires or tires at the same temperature as the ambient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when the tires are cold, i.e.:

  • A distance traveled of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded.
  • If the vehicle has not moved again for at least two hours after a trip.

If equipped with an emergency wheel: check the tire pressure of the emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly and correct if necessary.
Checking using the tire inflation pressure specifications on the Control Display

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Vehicle status”
  4. “Tire Pressure Monitor”
  5. Check whether the current tire inflation pressure levels deviate from the intended tire pressure value.
  6. Correct the tire pressure of a tire if the current tire pressure deviates from the in-tended tire pressure.

The display of the current tire pressure may be limited when the vehicle is stationary. After a short drive, the tire pressure is updated.

After correcting the tire pressure
If equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor, the corrected tire pressures are applied automati-cally. Make sure that the correct tire settings have been made. With tires that cannot be found in the tire pressure values on the control display, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM).
If equipped with a flat tire monitor, reinitialize the flat tire monitor.

Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table and adjust as necessary.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-1

These pressure values can also be found on the tire pressure label on the driver’s door pil-lar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

Tire marking

Tire size

  • 245/45 R 18 96 Y
  • 245: nominal width in mm
  • 45: cross-sectional relationship in %R: radial tire code
  • 18: rim diameter in inches
  • 96: load bearing capacity
  • Y: speed code letter
  • ZR tires: reinforced radial tire for speeds ex-ceeding 150 mph/240 km/h

Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissi-ble weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating –GAWR – on the certification label on the driver door B-pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 1922
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
1922: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread depth, replace tires at least every 6 years.

Manufacture date
You can find the manufacture date of the tire on the tire sidewall.

Designation Manufacture date

  • DOT … 1922 19th week 2022

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera-ture A

DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, how-ever, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteris-tics and climate.

Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perform-ance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Runflat tires
Runflat tires, refer to page 267, are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.

Tire tread 

Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased risk of aquaplaning.

Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for winter driving conditions.

Minimum tread depthBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-3

Distributed over the tire circumference are the tire manufacturer’s wear indicators with a height of at least 0.06 in/1.6 mm, which serve as an indicator of tire tread wear.
The positions of the wear indicators are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Irrespective of the wear indicators, observe the statutory regulations on the minimum tread depth.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tire damage

General information
Check your tires regularly for damage, foreign bodies lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal-functions:

  • Unusual vibrations.
  • Unusual tire or running noises.
    Damage can be caused by the following situations, for instance:
  •  Driving over curbs.
  • Road damage.
  • Tire pressure too low.
  • Vehicle overloading.
  • Incorrect tire storage.

Safety information

Warning
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam-age is suspected while driving, immediately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this purpose, drive care-fully to the nearest authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires, but have them replaced.

Warning
Tires can become damaged by driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-sec-tion, the higher the risk of tire damage. There may be a risk of accidents and risk of dam-age to property. If possible, avoid driving over objects or road conditions that may damage tires, or drive over them slowly and carefully.

Exchanging wheels and tires

Mounting and wheel balancing
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Approved wheels and tires
General information
The following sizes are recommended and approved by the vehicle manufacturer for the ap-proved wheels and tires per vehicle type and special equipment:

  • Wheel and tire combinations.
  • Rim designs.
  • Tire sizes.
  •  Tire brands.

You can ask an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop about the approved wheels and tires for the vehicle and the special equipment.

Safety information

Warning
Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for instance due to contact with the body due to tolerances despite the same official size rating. There is a risk of an accident. The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly sug-gests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type.

Warning
Mounted steel wheels can cause technical problems, for instance unexpected loosening of the lug bolts and damage to the brake disks. There is a risk of accident. Do not mount steel wheels.

Warning
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will impair the vehicle’s handling characteristics and a variety of system functions, such as the Antilock Braking System or Dynamic Stability Control. There is a risk of accident. To main-tain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires with a single tread configuration from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the original wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Recommended tire brands 

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-4

For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehicle recommends certain tire brands. The tire brands can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.

New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brand new.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires

Warning
Retreated tires can have different tire casing structures. With advanced age the service life can be limited. There is a risk of accident. The manufacturer of the vehicle does not rec-ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Winter tires
General information BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-5

Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads.
Winter tires can be identified by the icon with mountain and snowflake, as well as the M+S marking on the tire sidewall.
All-season tires with the M+S designation, but without icon with mountain and snowflake, have better winter characteristics than summer tires but generally do not achieve the perform-ance of winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then attach a sign showing the permissible maximum speed in the field of vision. The sign is available from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not exceed the permissible maximum speed.

Changing runflat tires
When changing from runflat tires to standard tires, it must be ensured that the vehicle con-tains an emergency wheel or tire mobility kit. Further information is available from an au-thorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Wheel change between axles

Warning
A wheel change between the axles on vehi-cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front and rear axles can cause damage to the tires and the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Do not rotate the tires between the axles on vehicles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front and rear axles.

Different abrasion patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs between the axles to achieve even abra-sion. Further information is available from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. After changing, check the tire pressure and correct, if needed.

Storing tires

Tire pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres-sure indicated on the tire sidewall. .

Storage

  • Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark place.
  • Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease, and solvents.
  • Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
  • Remove dirt from wheels or tires.

Runflat tires

Principle
Runflat tires permit continued driving under limited conditions even in the event of a com-plete tire pressure loss.

General information
The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup-porting to a limited degree and may also in-clude special rims.
The reinforcement of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a limited degree in the event of a tire pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driving with a flat tire.

Safety information 

Warning
The vehicle handles differently when a runflat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced directional stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Identification 

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-6

Runflat tires are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Repairing a flat tire

Safety precautions 

  • Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground.
  • Turn on the hazard warning system.
  • Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.
  • Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock. Have all vehicle occupants get out and make sure that they remain outside the hazardous area such as behind a guardrail.
  • If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Tire repair set

Principle
With the tire repair set, minor tire damage can be sealed temporarily to enable continued driving.

General information 

  • To enable continued driving, liquid sealant is pumped into the tire, which hardens and seals the damage from the inside.
  • Follow the instructions on using the tire re-pair set found on the compressor and seal-ant bottle.
  • The use of a tire repair set can be ineffective if the tire puncture measures above ap-prox. 0.16 in/4 mm.
  • Contact an authorized service center or an-other qualified service center or repair shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
  • Do not remove foreign objects that have penetrated the tire. Remove foreign objects only when they are visibly protruding from the tire.
  • Detach the speed limit sticker from the sealant bottle and apply it to the steering wheel.
  • With the Tire Pressure Monitor: using seal-ant can damage the wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.
  • The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.

Overview

Storage
Storage for the tire repair set kit is provided in the left side of the cargo area.

Sealant bottleBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-7

  • Sealant bottle, arrow 1.
  • Filler hose, arrow 2.
    Observe expiration date on the sealant bottle.

CompressorBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-8

  1. Sealant bottle unlocking
  2. Sealant bottle mount
  3. Tire pressure display
  4. Reduce tire inflation pressure button 5 On/off switch
  5. Compressor
  6. Connector/cable for socket
  7. Connection hose

Safety precautions 

  • Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground.
  • Turn on the hazard warning system.
  • Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.
  • Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock.
  • Have all vehicle occupants get out and make sure that they remain outside the hazardous area such as behind a guardrail.
  • If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Filling the tire with sealing compound

Safety information 

DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are colorless and odorless. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

NOTICE
The compressor can overheat during ex-tended operation. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes.

Filling

  1. Shake the sealant bottle. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-9
  2. Pull filler hose completely out of the cover of the sealant bottle. Do not kink the hose. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-10
  3. Slide the sealant bottle into the mount on the compressor housing, ensuring that it engages audibly.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-11
  4. Screw the filler hose of the sealant bottle onto the tire valve of the faulty wheel.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-12
  5. With the compressor switched off, insert the connector into the power socket in the vehicle interior. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-13
  6. With standby state or drive-ready state switched on, switch on the compressor.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-14

Let the compressor run for a maximum of 10 minutes to fill in the tire sealant and reach a tire pressure of approx. 2 bar/29 psi.
While the tire is being filled with the tire seal-ant, the tire pressure can briefly go up to ap-prox. 5 bar/73 psi. Do not switch off the com-pressor in this phase.

Checking and adjusting the tire inflation pressure

Checking

  1. To continue the trip, a tire pressure of at least 2 bar/29 psi must be reached.
  2. Removing and stowing the sealant bottle
    To continue the trip, a tire pressure of at least 2 bar/29 psi must be reached.

Removing and stowing the sealant bottle 

  1. Unscrew the filler hose of the sealant bottle from the tire valve.
  2. Press the red unlocking device.
  3. Remove the sealant bottle from the com-pressor.
  4. Wrap and store the sealant bottle in suitable material to avoid contamination of the cargo area.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is not reached

  1. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior.
  2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis-tribute the sealing compound in the tire.
  3. Screw the connection hose of the compressor directly onto the tire valve stem. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-15
  4. Insert the connector into the power socket  in the vehicle interior. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-16
  5. With standby or drive readiness turned on, turn on the compressor and let it run for a maximum of 10 minutes.
    If the tire pressures does not reach at least 2 bar/29 psi, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or a repair shop.
    When a tire pressure of at least 2 bar/29 psi is reached, see Minimum tire pressure is reached.
  6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com-pressor from the tire valve.
  7. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior.
  8. Stow the tire repair set in the vehicle.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached

  1. Unscrew the connection hose of the com-pressor from the tire valve.
  2. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior.
  3. Stow the tire repair set in the vehicle.
  4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealing compound is evenly distributed in the tire.
    Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
    If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h.

Adjustment

  1. Stop at a suitable location.
  2. Screw the connection hose of the compres-sor directly onto the tire valve stem. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-17
  3. Insert the connector into the power socket in the vehicle interior. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-18
  4. Correct the tire pressure to at least 2 bar/29 psi:
    • Increase tire pressure: with standby or drive readiness turned on, turn on the compressor and let it run for a maxi-mum of 10 minutes.
    • Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the button on the compressor.
  5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com-pressor from the tire valve.
  6. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior.
  7. Stow the tire repair set in the vehicle.

Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the permissible maximum speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Re-initialize the flat tire monitor or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the faulty tire and the sealant bottle of the tire repair set promptly.
Additional information:

Tire chains

Safety information 

Warning
Mounting tire chains on unsuitable tires can cause the tire chains to come into contact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only mount tire chains on tires that are designated by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of tire chains.

Warning
Insufficiently tight tire chains may damage tires and vehicle components. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to prop-erty. Make sure that the tire chains are al-ways sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according to the tire chain manufacturer’s in-structions.

Fine-link tire chains
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends the use of fine-link tire chains. Certain types of fine-link tire chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable tire chains is available from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Use
Use is only permitted in pairs on rear wheels equipped with the tires of the following wheel/tire sizes:

Tire size Wheel size Rim offset (IS)

  • 225/45 R18 7.5J x 18 25

Information on the wheel size and rim offset is located on the inside of the wheel.
The list can also include wheel/tire sizes that are only suitable for certain models.
Information about approved wheels and tires for the vehicle can be requested from an au-thorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Follow the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions.
If equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor: with tire chains, do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, otherwise, incorrect displays may oc-cur.
If the vehicle is equipped with a flat tire monitor: with tire chains, do not initialize the flat tire monitor, otherwise, incorrect displays may occur.
When driving with tire chains, activate the Dynamic Traction Control briefly to optimize the drive power.

Maximum speed with tire chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using tire chains.

Tire pressure monitor

Principle
The Tire Pressure Monitor monitors the tire pressure and issues a warning if the tire pres-sure has dropped.

General information
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire in-flation pressure and tire temperature.
Depending on the tires detected or registered, the system displays the specified nominal pressures on the control display and compares them with the current tire pressures.
If tires are being used that are not specified in the tire inflation pressure details on the ve-hicle, such as tires with special approval, the system needs to be actively reset. The system will then take over the actual tire inflation pres-sures as the target pressures.
When operating the system, also note the in-formation found in the Tire inflation pressure chapter.
Additional information:
Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 258.

Safety information

Warning
The display of the target pressures is not
a substitute for the tire inflation pressure de-tails on the vehicle. Incorrect entries in the tire settings can lead to incorrect target tire inflation pressure values. In this case, it can-not be guaranteed that the notification of a tire pressure loss will be reliable. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Ensure that the tire sizes of the mounted tires are displayed correctly and match the details on the tires and on the vehicle.

Functional requirements
The following prerequisites must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable notification of a tire pressure loss is not assured:

  • After each tire or wheel change, the system detects and updates the mounted tires on the control display and displays them after a short trip. Enter the information about the mounted tires in the tire settings when the system does not automatically detect the tires.
    • The Tire Pressure Monitor does not acti-vate until after driving for a few minutes:
    • After a tire or wheel change.
    • After a reset, for tires with special ap-proval.
    • After changing the tire setting.
  • For tires with special approval:
    • After a tire or wheel change, a reset was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure.
    •  After the tire inflation pressure was ad-justed to a new value, a reset was per-formed.
  • Wheels with wheel electronics.

Tire settings

General information
The information about the mounted tires can be entered in the tire settings if the system does not automatically detect the tires.
The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be gathered from the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle or directly on the tires.
The tire details do not need to be re-entered when the tire pressure is corrected.
For summer and winter tires, the tire details entered last are stored. After a tire or wheel change, the settings of the tire sets used last can be selected.

Changing settings 

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Vehicle status”
  4. “Tire Pressure Monitor”
  5. “Tire settings”
  6. “Tire selection”
  7. “Manual”
  8. “Tire type”
  9. Select the tire dimension that is mounted on the rear axle.
    For tires with special approval:
    “Other tires”
    Observe further proceeding in the perform a reset section.
  10. Select the maximum road speed that will be used with the tires.
  11.  “Save tire settings”

The measurement of the current tire inflation pressure is started. The measurement prog-ress is displayed.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Status display

Current status
The system status can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys-tem is active.

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Vehicle status”
  4. “Tire Pressure Monitor” The current status is displayed.

Current tire pressure
The current tire pressure is displayed for each tire.
The current tire inflation pressures may change during driving or depending on the out-side temperature.

Current tire temperature
Depending on the model, the current tire temperatures are displayed.
The current tire temperatures may change while driving or due to the outside temperature.

Nominal pressure
The nominal pressure for the tires on the front and rear axles is displayed.
The specified nominal pressures take the in-fluence of driving and outside temperature on the tire temperature into account. The appro-priate nominal pressure is always displayed, independent of the weather situation, tire tem-peratures and travel times.
The displayed nominal pressure may change and may differ from the tire inflation pressure details on the door pillar of the driver’s door. The tire inflation pressure can thus be cor-rected to the value of the displayed target pressures.
The nominal pressure is immediately adjusted if the vehicle load status is changed in the tire settings.

Tire conditions

General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the control display.
Any existing messages may not be deleted if the nominal pressure is not reached after the tire inflation pressure is corrected.

All wheels green 

  • The system is active and bases warnings on the target pressures.
  •  For tires with special approval: the system is active and bases warnings on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last re-set.

One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major tire pressure loss has occur-red in the indicated tires.

Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
Possible causes:

  • Malfunction.
  • During tire inflation pressure measurement, after confirmation of the tire settings.
  • For tires with special approval: a reset is performed for the system.

For tires with special approval: performing a reset

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Vehicle status”
  4. “Tire Pressure Monitor”
  5. Make sure that correct tire settings have been made.
    Tire settings, refer to page 274.
  6. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive off.
  7. Reset tire pressure: “Perform reset”.
  8. Drive off.

The wheels are displayed in gray and the fol-lowing is displayed: “Resetting tire pressure…”.
After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as the predefined tire inflation pressures. The reset is completed automatically while driving.
After a successfully completed reset, the wheels on the control display are shown in green and the following is displayed: “Reset successful.”
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue driving the reset resumes auto-matically.

Messages: for tires without special approval

General information
When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Sta-bility Control may be turned on.

Safety information 

Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or no tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Runflat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information on runflat tires and continued driving with these tires.

If a tire inflation pressure check is required

Message
An icon with a Check Control message appears on the control display.

Icon Possible cause
BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-19Inflation was not carried out accord-ing to specifications, for instance when the tire has not been sufficiently inflated or in the case of a natural steady tire pressure loss.

Measure
Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
If the tire inflation pressure is too low

Message
BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-20A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes-sage appears on the control display.

Icon Possible cause

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-21There is a tire pressure loss.

Measure

  1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
  2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a filling station, check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires and correct if necessary.

If there is a significant tire pressure loss

Message 

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-20A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.
In addition, an icon with the affected tire ap-pears in a Check Control message on the con-trol display.

Icon Possible cause
BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-22There is a flat tire or a major tire pressure loss.

Measure

  1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
  2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with standard tires or runflattires.
    Runflat tires are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
    Runflat tires, refer to page 267.
  3. Read the description on what to do in case of a flat tire. Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to page 278.

Messages: for tires with special approval
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Sta-bility Control may be turned on.

Safety information

Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or no tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Runflat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information on runflat tires and continued driving with these tires.

If a tire inflation pressure check is required

Message
An icon with a Check Control message appears on the control display.

Icon Possible cause 

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-19Inflation was not carried out accord-ing to specifications, e.g., the tire has not been sufficiently inflated.
The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last reset.
No reset was performed for the sys-tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

  1. Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
  2. Perform a system reset.

If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-20A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster. “

In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes-sage appears on the control display.

Icon Possible cause 

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-21There is a tire pressure loss.
No reset was performed for the sys-tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

  1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
  2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a fill-ing station, check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires and correct if necessary.
  3. Perform a system reset.

If there is a significant tire pressure loss

Message
BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-21A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.
In addition, an icon with the affected tire ap-pears in a Check Control message on the con-trol display.

Icon Possible cause
BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-22There is a flat tire or a major tire pressure loss.
No reset was performed for the sys-tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure 

  1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
  2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with standard tires or runflat tires.
    Runflat tires are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
    Runflat tires, refer to page 267.
  3. Read the description on what to do in case of a flat tire.
    Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to page 278.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Standard tires 

  1. Identify the damaged tire.
    Check the tire pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure display from a tire repair set.
    For tires with special approval: when the tire pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.
    If tire damage cannot be found, contact an authorized service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop.
  2. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire repair set or by changing the wheel.
    Use of sealing compound, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the wheel elec- tronics. Have the electronics replaced at the next opportunity.

Runflat tires
Safety information

Warning
The vehicle handles differently when a runflat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced directional stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire
Follow the following when continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

  1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-vers.
  2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
  3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.

Possible distance traveled with a depressurized tire
The possible distance which may be safely traveled varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road condi-tions, outside temperature. The distance trav-eled may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, the possible distance traveled may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will han-dle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following:

  • Greater likelihood of skidding of the vehicle.
  • Longer braking distances.
  • Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi-cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an acci-dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact an authorized service center or another qualified service cen-ter or repair shop.

System limits

Temperature
The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire’s temperature.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire temperature, thus increasing the tire infla-tion pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again.
These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply.
Following a temperature-related warning, the target pressures are displayed on the Control Display again after a short distance.

Sudden tire pressure loss
The system cannot indicate sudden and se-rious tire damage caused by external circum-stances.

Failure performing a reset
Tires with special approval: the system will not function correctly if a reset was not performed, for example a flat tire may be indicated al-though the tire inflation pressures are correct.

Malfunction

Message
The yellow warning light flashes and is then illuminated continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. It may not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.

Measure 

  • A wheel without wheel electronics is mounted: have the wheels checked, if needed.
  • Fault caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.
  • For tires with special approval: the system was unable to complete the reset. Perform a system reset again.
  • Tire Pressure Monitor malfunction: have the system checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pres-sure telltale. When the system detects a mal-function, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously il-luminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function-ing properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re-placement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Flat tire monitor

Principle
The flat tire monitor detects a tire pressure loss while driving and issues a warning if the tire pressure has dropped.

General information
The system detects tire pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differences between the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire pressure loss, the diame-ter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. The difference will be detected and reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla-tion pressure in the tires.

Functional requirements
The following prerequisites must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable notification of a tire pressure loss is not assured:

  • After a tire or wheel change, an initialization was carried out at the correct tire pressure.
  • After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new value, an initialization was performed.

Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor can be displayed, e.g., whether the flat tire monitor is active.

  1. MENU”
  2. Vehicle apps”
  3. Vehicle status”
  4. Flat Tire Monitor” The status is displayed.

Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the fol-lowing situations:

  • After the tire inflation pressure has been adjusted.
  • After a tire or wheel change.

Performing initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with tire chains.

  1. MENU”
  2. Vehicle apps”
  3. Vehicle status”
  4. Flat Tire Monitor”
  5. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive off.
  6. Start the initialization with: “Perform reset”
  7. Drive off.

The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when driving continues.

Messages

General information
When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Sta-bility Control (DSC) is turned on, if needed.

Safety information

Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or no tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Runflat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information on runflat tires and continued driving with these tires.

Indication of a flat tire
BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-20A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes-sage appears on the control display.

Icon Possible cause 
BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-20There is a flat tire or a major tire pressure loss.

Measure

  1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
  2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with standard tires or runflat tires.
    Runflat tires are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
    Runflat tires, refer to page 267.
  3. Read the description on what to do in case of a flat tire.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Standard tires

  1. Identify the damaged tire.
    To do this, check the tire pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure display from a tire repair set.
    When the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the flat tire monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.
    If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
  2. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire repair set or by changing the wheel.

Runflat tires

Safety information 

Warning
The vehicle handles differently when a runflat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced directional stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Follow the following when continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

  1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-vers.
  2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
  3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.
    When the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the flat tire monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible distance traveled with a depressurized tire
The possible distance which may be safely traveled varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, outside temperature. The distance traveled may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, the possible distance traveled may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will han-dle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following:

  • Greater likelihood of skidding of the vehicle.
  • Longer braking distances.
  • Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi-cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an acci-dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact an authorized service center or another qualified service cen-ter or repair shop.

System limits
The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations:

  • A natural, even tire pressure loss in all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
  • Sudden and serious tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recog-nized in advance.
  • The system has not been initialized.
  • When driving on a snowy or slippery road.
  • Sporty driving style: slip on traction wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
  • When driving with tire chains.

Changing wheels/tires

General information
When using runflat tires or a tire repair set, the wheel does not always need to be changed immediately in the event of a breakdown when there is tire pressure loss.
If needed, the appropriate tool for a wheel change, e.g., a jack, is available as an acces-sory from an authorized service center, an-other qualified service center or a repair shop.

Safety information 

Warning
The jack is only provided for short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all safety precautions are observed, there is a risk of the raised vehicle falling if the jack tips over. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. When the vehicle is raised with the jack, do not lie under the vehicle and do not switch on the drive-ready state.

Warning
Supports such as wooden blocks under the jack reduce the load-carrying capacity of the jack to bear weight. The load-carrying capacity of the wooden blocks may be ex-ceeded and the vehicle may tip over. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not place supports under the jack.

Warning
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is provided in order to perform a wheel change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is not designed for frequent use; for example, changing from summer to winter tires. Using the jack frequently may cause it to become jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only use the jack to change an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a breakdown.

Warning
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex-ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the jack can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re-sistant surface.

Warning
The jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the jack.

Warning
When the jack is not inserted into the jacking point provided for this purpose, the vehicle may be damaged or the jack may slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When cranking up the jack, ensure that it is inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel well.

Warning
A vehicle that is raised on a jack may fall
off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-age to property. While the vehicle is raised, do not exert lateral effort on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by an authorized service cen-ter or another qualified service center or re-pair shop.

NOTICE
Using an impact wrench to loosen or tighten the wheel lock bolt can damage it. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Only use a lug wrench to loosen and tighten the wheel lock bolt.

Securing the vehicle against rolling away

General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad-ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling away when changing a wheel.

On a level surface BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-23

Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the wheel to be changed.

On a slight downhill gradientBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-24

If you need to change a wheel on a slight downhill grade, place chocks and other suit- able objects, for instance rocks, under the proper side of the wheels of both the front and rear axles to block the car from rolling downhill.

Lug bolt lock

Principle
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The lug bolts can only be released with the adapter which matches the coding.

Overview
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the on-board vehicle tool kit or in a storage compartment close to the onboard vehicle tool kit.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-25

  • Lug lock bolt, arrow 1.
  • Adapter, arrow 2.

Unscrewing 

  1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt.
  2. Unscrew the lug lock bolt.
  3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug bolt.

Screwing on

  1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt. If necessary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug lock bolt.
  2. Screw on the lug lock bolt. The tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
    Remove the adapter and stow it after screwing on the lug bolt.

Preparing the vehicle

  • Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground at a safe distance from road traffic.
  • Turn on the hazard warning system.
  • Set the parking brake.
  • Engage a gear or move the selector lever to position P.
  •  As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out and make sure that they remain outside the hazardous area such as behind a guardrail.
  • Depending on the vehicle equipment, get wheel change tools and, if necessary, the emergency wheel from the vehicle.
  • If necessary, set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning light at an appro-priate distance.
  • Secure the vehicle additionally against roll-ing away.
  • Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking pointsBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-27

The jacking points are located at the indicated positions.

Jacking up the vehicle

Warning
Hands and fingers can be jammed when using the jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply with the described hand position and do not change this position while using the jack.

  1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1, and grasp the jack crank handle or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-26
  2. Insert the jack into the rectangular recess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-27
  3. Extend the jack by turning the jack crank handle or lever clockwise.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-29
  4. Take your hand away from the jack as soon as the jack is under load and continue turn-ing the jack crank handle or lever with one hand.
  5. Make sure that the car jack foot extends vertically and is at a right angle beneath the jacking point. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-30
  6.  Make sure that the car jack foot is vertical and at a right angle beneath the jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Wheels-and-tires-fig-31
  7. Crank the vehicle up until the vehicle jack has the entire surface on the ground and the relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.

Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.

  1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
  2. Remove the wheel.
  3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two lug bolts in a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
    When non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the accompanying lug bolts may have to be used as well.
  4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat-tern.
  5. Turn the jack crank handle counterclockwise to retract the jack and lower the vehi-cle.
  6. Remove the jack and stow it securely.

After the wheel change

  1.  Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
  2. Stow the faulty wheel in the cargo area, if necessary.
  3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next opportunity and correct as needed.
  4. Re-initialize the flat tire monitor or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
  5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench.
  6. Have the damaged tire renewed at the nearest authorized service center or an-other qualified service center or repair shop.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

FAQ

Q: What type of fuel does the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe require?

A: The specific fuel type required can vary by engine option, but it’s typically premium unleaded gasoline.

Q: What is the fuel tank capacity of the 2 Series Coupe?

A: The fuel tank capacity varies depending on the trim level and engine but is generally around [insert gallons].

Q: Does the 2 Series Coupe have a fuel-efficient driving mode?

A: Some models may offer driving modes that optimize fuel efficiency, such as an Eco mode.

Q: Are there any fuel-saving tips for maximizing the 2 Series Coupe’s fuel economy?

A: To improve fuel economy, consider maintaining a steady speed, avoiding rapid acceleration, and keeping up with regular maintenance.

Q: How can I check the fuel efficiency and monitor fuel consumption in the 2 Series Coupe?

A: The vehicle’s onboard computer typically provides real-time and average fuel economy data in the instrument cluster or infotainment system.

Q: What is the recommended tire pressure for the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe?

A: The recommended tire pressure can usually be found on the driver’s door jamb or in the owner’s manual, and it should be checked regularly.

Q: Are run-flat tires available as an option, and how do they work?

A: Run-flat tires may be available, and they are designed to allow you to continue driving at reduced speeds even after a puncture or loss of tire pressure.

Q: What is the standard wheel size for the 2 Series Coupe, and are there optional wheel choices?

A: The standard wheel size may vary by trim level, but BMW often offers optional wheel choices for customization.

Q: How often should I rotate the tires, and why is it important?

A: Regular tire rotations, typically every 6,000 to 8,000 miles, help ensure even tire wear and extend tire life.

Q: Are there any specific tips for driving in winter conditions with the 2 Series Coupe?

A: When driving in winter conditions, consider installing winter tires for improved traction and follow safe winter driving practices like reducing speed and increasing following distance.

Q: Can I use aftermarket wheels and tires on the 2 Series Coupe?

A: You can use aftermarket wheels and tires, but it’s essential to ensure they are the correct size and specifications for your vehicle.

Q: What should I do in case of a flat tire or tire damage while driving?

A: If you experience a flat tire or tire damage, you can often use the provided spare tire or run-flat tires to continue driving to a service center.

Q: How can I keep the wheels and rims clean and well-maintained?

A: Regularly cleaning and waxing the wheels and rims can help prevent corrosion and maintain their appearance.

Q: Are there any wheel or tire care accessories available for the 2 Series Coupe?

A: DepeNding on availability, you may find wheel and tire care accessories like tire covers or tire storage bags to protect and maintain your tires.

Q: Is a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) included, and how does it work?

A: The 2 Series Coupe typically includes a TPMS that monitors tire pressure and alerts you if it falls below a certain threshold, helping you maintain proper tire pressure.

Useful Link

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 User Manual
https://www.bmwusa.com/owners-manuals.html
2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

2023 BMW 2 SERIES COUPE DRIVING TIPS

BMW-Logo

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 DRIVING TIPS

BMW-2-Series-2023

The trip in a 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe is more than just a way to get to work; it’s an exciting adventure. This sleek two-door coupe is known for its powerful speed and precise engineering, but it takes a skilled driver to get the most out of it. The 2 Series Coupe requires a delicate balance of power and skill, whether you’re driving through city streets, up and down winding mountain roads, or down an open highway. These driving tips are meant to improve your connection with the road and make every drive in this BMW not just a way to get somewhere, but a symphony of driving pleasure. They will help you learn how to get the most out of your gas mileage and understand the differences between the different driving modes.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.

Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Break-in procedures

General information
Moving parts need to work together smoothly. The following instructions will help you to achieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.

Safety information 

Warning
Due to new parts and components, safety and driver assistance systems can react with a delay. There is a risk of an accident. After installing new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conservatively and intervene early if necessary. Observe the break-in procedures of the respective parts and components.

Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

  • Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed:
    Avoid full throttle or kickdown under all circumstances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur-ing circumstances when tires are brand new.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.

Brake system
Brake disks and brake pads only
reach their full effectiveness after ap-
prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately during this break-in period.

Following part replacement
Observe the break-in procedures again if com-ponents mentioned above are replaced.

General driving notes

Closing the trunk lid Safety information

Warning
An open trunk lid protrudes from the vehicle and can endanger occupants and other road users or damage the vehicle in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the ve-hicle interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not drive with the trunk lid open.

Driving with the trunk lid open
If the vehicle still needs to be driven with the trunk lid open:

  • Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
  • Greatly increase the blower output.
  • Drive moderately.
  • Fasten the trunk lid, e.g., with a tensioning belt.

Ice on window glass 

NOTICE
The window will be lowered slightly when pulling on the door handle. In the event of frost, the window may be frozen solid and may not be able to be lowered. There is a risk of damage to property, among other poten-tial damage. When pulling on the door han-dle, make sure that the window is lowered. If necessary, remove snow and ice from the window. Do not open the door with force.

Hot exhaust system

Warning
High temperatures can occur underneath the body, for instance caused by the exhaust system, while driving. Contact with the ex-haust system can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the hot exhaust system, including the exhaust pipe.

Warning
If combustible materials, such as leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, these materials can ignite. There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts while driving, in Neutral or during parking.

Exhaust gas particulate filter

Principle
The exhaust gas particulate filter collects soot particles. The soot particles are burned at high temperatures to clean the exhaust gas particu-late filter as necessary.

General information
During several minutes of cleaning the follow-ing may occur:

  • Temporarily, the engine may run less smoothly.
  • A somewhat higher RPM is necessary to reach usual power development.
  • A slight smoke formation coming from the exhaust system, even after the engine is switched off.
  • Noises, such as those caused by the radia-tor fan running, even several minutes after the engine is switched off.
    Overrun of the radiator fan for several minutes is normal even after short trips.

Climate comfort laminated safetyglass
The vehicle glazing provides full protection against the harmful effects of ultraviolet radia-tion on the skin. In addition, vehicle glazing re-duces heat radiation and prevents the interior from becoming too hot.

Mobile radio in the vehicle

Warning
Vehicle electronics and mobile communica-tion devices can influence one another. There is radiation due to the transmission oper-ations of mobile communication devices. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. If possible, in the car’s interior only use mobile communication devices, such as mobile phones, with a direct connection to an external antenna or the Personal eSIM in order to prevent mutual interference and to deflect radiation from the vehicle interior.

Aquaplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as aquaplan-ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.

Driving through water

General information
When driving through water, follow the follow-ing:

  • Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function.
  • Drive through calm water only.
  • Drive through water only up to a maximum height of 9.8 inches/25 cm.
  • Drive through water at a maximum of walk-ing speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.

Safety information

NOTICE
When driving too quickly through deep water, the water can penetrate the engine compart-ment, the electrical system, or the transmis-sion. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. When driv-ing through water, do not exceed the maxi-mum indicated water level and the maximum speed for driving through water.

Braking safely

General information
The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Brak-ing System as a standard feature.
Perform emergency braking in situations that require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering movement.
The pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that the An-tilock Braking System is in its active mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated brake disks can emit functional noises. How-ever, functional noises have no effect on the performance and operational reliability of the brake.

Objects in the travel path of the pedals 

Warning
Objects in the driver’s footwell can limit the pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and can-not enter into the driver’s footwell. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditions
In case of wet roads, exposure to road salt or in heavy rain, gently depress the brake pedal every few kilometers.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users. The heat generated during braking dries brake disks and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.
In this way the brake force will be available when you need it.

Hills

General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking effort. Other-wise, the brake system may overheat and re-duce braking effect.
You can increase the engine’s braking effect by downshifting, going all the way to first gear, if needed.
Depending on vehicle equipment, change gear using the shift paddle or selector lever position D/L.

Safety information

Warning
Light but consistent pressure on the brake pedal can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake system failure. There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing ex-cessive stress on the brake system.

Warning
In idle state or with the engine switched off, safety functions, for instance engine braking effect, braking assistance and steering assis-tance, may not be available. There is a risk of accident. Do not attempt to drive in idle state or with the engine switched off.

Brake disk corrosion
Corrosion on the brake disks and contamina-tion on the brake pads are increased by the following circumstances:

  • Low mileage.
  • Extended stationary periods.
  • Infrequent use of the brakes.
  • Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning agents.

Corrosion buildup on the brake disks will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes when braking slowly – generally this cannot be corrected.

Condensation water under the parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con-densation water develops and collects under-neath the vehicle.

Roof-mounted luggage rack

General information
Roof-mounted luggage racks are available as optional accessories.

Safety information 

Warning
When driving with a roof load, for instance with roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle’s center of gravity is higher, which increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situations. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Drive with roof load only with activated Dynamic Stability Control.

Roof strip with flaps
The mounting points are located in the roof strip above the doors. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-DRIVING TIPS-FIG-1

Fold the cover outward.

Installation

Follow the assembly instructions of the roof rack.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.

Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the vehicle’s center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and driving:

  • Do not exceed the approved roof/axle weights and the approved gross vehicle weight.
  • Distribute the roof load uniformly.
  • The roof load should not extend past the loading area.
  • Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom.
  • Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance using luggage straps.
  • Do not let objects project into the swiveling range of the trunk lid.
  • Drive cautiously and avoid driving off and braking with jerky movements or fast cornering.

Driving on racetracks

Warning
The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport or motorsport-like competition. There is a risk of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M Sport or motorsport-like competitions.

Higher mechanical and thermal loads during racetrack operation lead to increased wear. Use of the vehicle in M Sport or motor sport type competition is an improper use of the ve-hicle and may affect your warranty coverage. Please consult the “New Vehicle Limited Warranty” Booklet for further information on warranty matters.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Saving fuel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.

Additional information:
Vehicle equipment

Reducing fuel consumption 

General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies for the reduction of consumption and emission values.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of different factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a moderate driving style and regular maintenance, can influence fuel consumption and the envi-ronmental pollution.

Removing unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Removing attached parts following use
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero-dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Closing windows and glass sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased drag and raises fuel consumption.

Tires

General information
Tires can have different effects on the consumption values, consumption can be influenced by the tire size, for example.

Checking the tire pressure regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip.
Low tire pressure increases rolling resistance and thus fuel consumption and tire wear.

Additional information:
Tire pressure specifications

Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate RPM.
This is the fastest way of warming the cold engine up to operating temperature.

Anticipatory driving
A smooth and anticipatory driving style re-duces fuel consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
Maintain a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you.

Avoid high RPM
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.
If necessary, observe the vehicle’s gear shift indicator.

Using coasting/overrun mode
When approaching a red traffic light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle roll.
The fuel supply is interrupted in coasting/over-run mode.

Switch off the engine during longer stops

Switching off the engine
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic jam.

Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted rather than leaving the engine running con-stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec-onds of an engine stop. In addition, fuel consumption is also deter-mined by other factors, such as driving style, road conditions, maintenance or environmen-tal factors.

Switching off any functions that are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and increase fuel consumption, especially in city traffic and with stop-and-go driving.
Switch off these functions if they are not needed.
The ECO PRO driving mode supports the energy-saving use of comfort features. These functions are automatically deactivated, either partially or completely.

Having maintenance carried out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW recommends that maintenance work be performed by a BMW service center.
Also refer to BMW Maintenance System.

ECO PRO

Principle
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on consumption. For this purpose, the engine control and comfort features, for instance the climate control output, are adjusted.
When certain prerequisites are met the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position. The ve-hicle continues traveling in Neutral to reduce consumption. The D selector lever position re-mains engaged.
In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO PRO tips, are displayed to assist with an efficient driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in the instrument cluster as bonus range.

General information
The system includes the follow-ing Efficient Dynamics functions and Efficient Dynamics displays:

  • ECO PRO seat climate control.
  • ECO PRO climate control.
  • ECO PRO view.
  • Driving style analysis.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-DRIVING TIPS-FIG-2

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-DRIVING TIPS-FIG-3ECO PRO

Selecting the driving mode 

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-DRIVING TIPS-FIG-3Press the button. ECO PRO is dis-played in the instrument cluster.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Configuring ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL

Via iDrive 

  1. MENU”
  2. Vehicle apps”
  3. Driving settings”
  4. Drivetrain and chassis”
  5. ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL”
  6. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating ECO PRO functions
The following ECO PRO functions can be activated/deactivated:

  • ECO PRO seat heating.
  • ECO PRO climate control.
  • ECO PRO light.

ECO PRO seat climate control
The activation of ECO PRO will reduce the out-put of the seat heating.

ECO PRO climate control
Climate control is set to be efficient.
This means that it is possible to deviate slightly from the set temperature or to heat or cool down the car’s interior more slowly to economize on consumption.

ECO PRO light
The output of exterior mirror heating and rear window defroster is reduced.
Depending on the equipment version, the dy-namic ECO lighting function is activated in ad-dition.

Resetting the settings 

  1. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-DRIVING TIPS-FIG-3Press the button.
  2. Settings”
  3. “Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD”

Using ECO PRO efficiently

Optimizing driving style
Power gauge
When ECO PRO driving mode is activated, the display switches to a special configuration. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-DRIVING TIPS-FIG-4

When driving efficiently, the power gauge is colored blue.
The display will change to gray if the driving style is inefficient.
Activate adaptive recuperative braking for efficient driving.

Display in case of inefficient driving style

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-DRIVING TIPS-FIG-5When driving above the efficient range, an arrow will be displayed.
    For instance, this is displayed for the following situations:
  • Excessive acceleration.
  • Excessive speed.
    In addition, a notice to coast in advance is dis-played.

Driving style analysis

Principle
The function helps develop an especially efficient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display.
This display will help you adjust your driving style and save some fuel.

General information
The range of the vehicle can be extended by adjusting your driving style.
The current trip is analyzed.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the instrument cluster and on the Control Display.

Functional requirement
This function is available in ECO PRO driving mode.

Calling up the efficiency evaluation 

  1. MENU”
  2. Vehicle apps”
  3. Live Vehicle”
    Additional information:
    Live Vehicle

Display on the control display
The display of the efficiency analysis shows the efficiency of the driving style.
The more efficient the driving style, the larger the area that is displayed in color and the faster the bonus range increases.
In contrast, a reduced area will be displayed with an inefficient driving style.

Adaptive recuperation 

Principle
The adaptive recuperation supports an adaptive and comfort-oriented driving style.
Various sensors analyze the current driving situation, e.g., the distance to the vehicle in front.

General information
Adaptive recuperation is available depending on the equipment and national-market version.
The system decides based on the situation if energy is recovered through recuperation or if the vehicle is to coast.
In vehicles with mild hybrid technology, the power of recuperation is adaptive, which causes the vehicle to decelerate to varying de-grees when coasting.

Functional requirements
The system active under the following conditions:

  • Brake pedal not depressed.
  •  Accelerator pedal not operated.
  • HYBRID ECO PRO driving mode is activated.
  • DSC Dynamic Stability Control is activated.

Activating/deactivating adaptive recuperation
Adaptive recuperation is deactivated in the following situations:

  • By activating driving mode: “SPORT”.
    • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-DRIVING TIPS-FIG-6Press the button.

Adaptive recuperation is activated when changing to another driving mode.

Display

Display in the instrument cluster
Adaptive recuperation can be displayed on the instrument cluster.
Additional information:
Power gauge

Display on the control display
The adaptive recuperation can be displayed on the control display.

Additional information:
Current driving condition

Engine off/coasting

Principle
The drive system allows the vehicle to roll freely with minimal deceleration in selector lever position D. This driving condition is refer-red to as coasting. This reduces fuel consump-tion.
Vehicles with mild hybrid technology do not consume fuel when coasting.

General information
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use the function often and supports the efficient effect of coasting.
Coasting is automatically adapted to the respective driving situation.
The coasting mode is displayed in the Live Vehicle menu as efficient coasting.

Additional information:
Live Vehicle

Exemplary driving situations
If a route can be traveled without an anticipated need for braking, it is advantageous to roll.
The following exemplary driving situations may be suitable:

  • Rolling on a straight downhill route without obstacles.
  • Coasting on a distance without obstacles. Avoid late or strong braking.

Functional requirements

  • Selector lever position D is engaged.
  • Brake is not depressed.
  • Accelerator pedal is not operated.
  • Engine and transmission are at operating temperature.

The function is available in the speed range from approx. 16 mph/25 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h.

Operation via shift paddles

Principle
Depending on your vehicle’s equipment, the Coasting mode can be influenced with the shift paddles.

Activating/deactivating coasting via shift paddles
Long press the right shift paddle to activate. To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.

System limits

  • While Active Cruise Control is active.
  • With defective, dirty or covered sensors.
  • Driving in the dynamic limit range and on steep uphill or downhill grades.
  • Battery charge status temporarily too low or vehicle electrical system drawing excessive current.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

FAQ

Q: What are some general driving tips for getting the best performance out of the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe?

A: General driving tips include regular maintenance, proper tire inflation, and using high-quality fuel.

Q: What’s the recommended break-in period for the 2 Series Coupe?

A: BMW typically recommends a break-in period of about 1,200 miles during which you should avoid high-speed driving and rapid acceleration.

Q: Are there any specific tips for driving in inclement weather, such as rain or snow?

A: Tips for driving in inclement weather include reducing speed, increasing following distance, and using appropriate tires.

Q: How can I optimize fuel efficiency while driving the 2 Series Coupe?

A: To improve fuel efficiency, practice smooth acceleration and braking, and keep your vehicle well-maintained.

Q: What driving mode settings are available, and when should I use them?

A: The 2 Series Coupe may have multiple driving modes like Comfort, Sport, and Eco. Use them based on your driving preferences and conditions.

Q: What should I know about maintaining the car’s brakes and when should I replace them?

A: Regularly inspect the brakes, and replace them when they show signs of wear, such as squeaking or reduced braking performance.

Q: Are there any tips for driving the 2 Series Coupe in a sportier manner?

A: To enjoy a sportier driving experience, consider using the Sport or Sport+ mode, which can adjust throttle response and suspension settings.

Q: How do I properly maintain the vehicle’s tires, and what’s the recommended tire pressure?

A: Follow the recommended tire pressure specified in the owner’s manual, and regularly check and maintain tire balance and alignment.

Q: Are there any specific recommendations for driving on highways or long-distance trips?

A: On highways, maintain a safe following distance, use cruise control when appropriate, and take regular breaks to stay alert.

Q: What should I do in case of a tire puncture or flat tire while driving?

A: If you experience a flat tire, BMW often provides a spare tire or run-flat tires, which allow you to drive to a service center at reduced speeds.

Q: What’s the best way to maintain the vehicle’s paint and exterior finish?

A: Regular washing, waxing, and avoiding harsh environmental conditions can help maintain the exterior finish.

Q: How do I properly clean and care for the interior materials, such as leather or upholstery?

A: Use recommended cleaning products and methods for interior materials like leather or upholstery to keep them in excellent condition.

Q: Are there any specific tips for parking and maneuvering the 2 Series Coupe in tight spaces?

A: The Coupe’s compact size makes it agile in parking situations, but always be mindful of surrounding vehicles and use parking aids if available.

Q: What should I do in case of a breakdown or emergency on the road?

A: Be prepared by carrying essential items like a first aid kit, flashlight, and emergency tools. Also, subscribe to a roadside assistance service.

Q: Can you provide tips for maintaining the vehicle’s overall longevity and resale value?

A: Regular maintenance, following manufacturer recommendations, and keeping service records can help maintain the vehicle’s longevity and resale value.

Useful Link

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 User Manual
https://www.bmwusa.com/owners-manuals.html
2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

2023 BMW 2 SERIES COUPE Cargo area Guidelines

BMW-Logo

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Cargo area

BMW-2-Series-2023

The cargo area of the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe is a good mix of versatility and usefulness. It goes well with the car’s focus on speed and has plenty of storage options. This elegant two-door coupe is known for how dynamic it is to drive. It also has a well-proportioned trunk that strikes the right balance between style and utility. It has a thoughtful layout that makes it easy to fit both everyday items and bags. The back seats can be folded down to make more room for goods, so it can be used for many different things. This trunk area isn’t just a place to put things; it’s also a sign of how committed BMW is to making cars that look good and work well, meeting the needs of drivers who want speed without sacrificing style.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equip-ment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.

Additional information:
Vehicle equipment

Loading

Safety information

Warning
High gross vehicle weight can overheat the tires, damage them internally and cause
a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving char-acteristics may be negatively impacted, re-ducing directional stability, lengthening the braking distances and changing the steering response. There is a risk of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load-carrying ca-pacity of the tires and never exceed the per-mitted gross vehicle weight.

Warning
Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable, such as mobile phones or loose objects, can be thrown through the vehicle interior while driving, such as in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices that are connected to the vehicle via a cable.

Warning
Improperly stowed objects can slip and be thrown into the car’s interior, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or an eva-sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and cargo properly.

NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.

Steps for determining correct load limit

  1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
  2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
  3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
  4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca-pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 – 750 (5 x
    150) = 650 lbs)
  5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
  6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load  from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

PayloadBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023

The maximum payload is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing and securing cargo

  • Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
  • Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi-ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear seat backrests.
    Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear seat backrests. When the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer seat belts in the opposite buckle.
  • If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow large cargo.
  • Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of the backrests.
  •  Small and light cargo: secure with luggage straps or, depending on the equipment, with a cargo net or draw straps.
  • Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo straps.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area 

General information
Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw straps, or cargo nets to the lashing eyes.

OverviewBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Cargo-area-FIG-2

The lashing eyes are located in the luggage compartment.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Multifunction hook

General information
Depending on the equipment, a multifunction hook is located on the left and right side in the cargo area.

Warning
Improper use of the multifunction hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about, e.g., dur-ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang lightweight objects from the multifunction hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been ap-propriately secured.

Net
Depending on the equipment, smaller objects can be stowed in the net on the left or right side. To transport larger objects, slide the net down.

Through-loading system

Principle
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrests.

General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 40–20–40. The right rear seat backrest and the center section can be folded down sepa-rately. The left rear seat backrest can be folded down together with the center section.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the cargo area. The center section can be separately folded down from the rear.

Safety information

Warning
There is a danger of jamming with folding down the rear seat backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear seat backrest and the of the head restraint is clear prior to folding down.

Warning
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior; for instance, in the event of an acci-dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after folding it back.

Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat setting or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

NOTICE
Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding down the rear seat backrest. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the area of move-ment of the rear seat backrest including head restraint is clear when folding down.

Folding down the rear seat backrest
From the cargo areaBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Cargo-area-FIG-3

Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area to release the rear seat backrest.

  • Left lever: fold down the left and middle rear seat backrest.
  • Right lever: fold down the right rear seat backrest.

Folding back the backrest
Return the rear seat backrest to the seat posi-tion and engage it.

Folding down middle sectionBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Cargo-area-FIG-4

Pull lever and fold the center section forward.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

FAQ

Q: What is the cargo capacity of the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe?

A: The cargo capacity can vary, but typically, the 2 Series Coupe offers enough space for everyday items and luggage.

Q: Are there any cargo management features in the trunk?

A: Some models may come with cargo management features like cargo nets, organizers, or tie-down points.

Q: Can the rear seats be folded down to expand the cargo space?

A: Depending on the specific model, the rear seats may be foldable to create more cargo space when needed.

Q: Is there a spare tire in the trunk, and if so, where is it located?

A: Some models may include a spare tire in the trunk, typically found in a designated storage area.

Q: Are there any additional storage compartments or hidden storage areas in the cargo area?

A: BMW sometimes incorporates hidden compartments or additional storage areas in the cargo area for added convenience.

Q: Does the trunk come with a power liftgate option for hands-free access?

A: Depending on the trim level and options, a power liftgate may be available for hands-free access to the trunk.

Q: What is the trunk’s shape, and can it accommodate larger items like golf clubs or luggage?

A: The trunk is typically designed to accommodate various sizes of luggage and larger items, making it suitable for practical use.

Q: Are there cargo tie-down hooks or rails in the trunk?

A: Some models may feature cargo tie-down hooks or rails to secure items during transportation.

Q: Is there a 12-volt power outlet or USB ports in the cargo area for charging devices?

A: The 2 Series Coupe may offer power outlets or USB ports in the cargo area for charging devices or powering accessories.

Q: Can I add a cargo cover or privacy shade as an accessory?

A: Depending on availability, you may be able to purchase a cargo cover or privacy shade as an accessory to protect your belongings from view.

Q: How does the cargo space in the 2 Series Coupe compare to other models in the BMW lineup?

A: It’s advisable to compare the cargo space in the 2 Series Coupe with other BMW models if you’re looking for specific storage capacity.

Q: Are there any cargo-related features in the rear seats, such as a pass-through for longer items?

A: Some models may offer a pass-through feature in the rear seats to accommodate longer items while maintaining passenger seating.

Q: Can I tow a trailer with the 2 Series Coupe, and if so, what is the towing capacity?

A: BMW typically provides towing specifications for its vehicles, and you may be able to tow a trailer with the 2 Series Coupe, depending on the model and engine.

Q: Does the cargo area have any lighting or illumination for convenience?

A: Many BMW models include cargo area lighting for added convenience, making it easier to access your belongings in low-light conditions.

Q: What cargo-related accessories and options are available for the 2023 2 Series Coupe?

A: Depending on the model and trim, various cargo-related accessories and options may be available, such as roof racks or cargo carriers.

Useful Link

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 User Manual
https://www.bmwusa.com/owners-manuals.html
2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Storage compartments User Manual

BMW-Logo

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Storage compartments

BMW-2-Series-2023

The 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe has been carefully thought out in terms of both performance and style, as well as in terms of how useful it is. With a well-thought-out set of storage spaces that are carefully built into the cabin’s design, this coupe combines luxury drive with day-to-day convenience. The 2 Series Coupe makes sure that everything you need is easy to get to. From the large glovebox that can easily hold essentials to the door pockets that are made to be easy to reach, to the flexible center console storage that has a place for your own things, everything you need is within reach. Whether it’s the hidden storage nooks that make driving easier or the optional rear-seat storage compartment that makes the car more useful, this car’s interior shows how committed BMW is to blending style, performance, and the daily practicality that modern drivers want.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.

Additional information:
Vehicle equipment

Safety information

Warning
Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable, such as mobile phones or loose objects, can be thrown through the vehicle interior while driving, such as in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices that are connected to the vehicle via a cable.

NOTICE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can damage the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.

Glove compartment

Safety information 

Warning
Folded open, the glove compartment pro-trudes in the car’s interior. Objects in the glove compartment can be thrown into the car’s interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the glove compartment immediately af-ter using it.

Opening the glove compartmentBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Storage-compartments-FIG-1

 

Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Closing the glove compartment
Fold the lid closed.

Fold-out compartment

Safety information

Warning
The open fold-out compartment protrudes into the vehicle interior. Objects in the fold-out compartment can be thrown into the ve-hicle interior during the trip, for instance, in the event of an accident or braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the fold-out compartment immediately after using it.

Opening the fold-out compartmentBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Storage-compartments-FIG-2

Pull the handle.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Storage compartments in the doors

General information
There are storage compartments in the doors.

Safety information

Warning
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or glasses, can break in the event of an acci-dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. Bro-ken glass can be scattered in the car’s inte-rior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not use any breakable objects while driving. Only stow breakable objects in closed storage compartments.

Storage tray in center console

Opening the storage compartmentBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Storage-compartments-FIG-3

Press on the cover.

Closing the storage compartment
Pull the cover on the handle back.

Front center armrest

General information
A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the seats.

Opening the center armrest BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Storage-compartments-FIG-4

Press the button.

Closing the center armrest
Press the lid down until it engages.

Front cup holder

Safety information

Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may damage the cup holders or be thrown about the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-ing traffic conditions and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Do not force objects into the cup holder. Use lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not transport hot beverages.

Opening the cup holderBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Storage-compartments-FIG-5

Press on the cover.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Storage-compartments-FIG-6

Two cup holders are located in the center con-sole.

Closing the cup holder
Pull the cover on the handle back.

Rear cup holder

Safety information

Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may damage the cup holders or be thrown about the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled liquids can distract from the surrounding traffic conditions and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Do not force objects into the cup holder. Use lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not transport hot beverages.

NOTICE
With an open cup holder, the center armrest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Press back the covers before the center armrest is folded up.

Opening the cup holder

  1. Fold down the center armrest. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Storage-compartments-FIG-7
  2. Press the button to open the cup holder.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Storage-compartments-FIG-8

Closing the cup holder
Press both covers back inward in sequence and fold the center armrest back.

Coat hooks

General information
The coat hooks are located on the door pillar in the rear.

Safety information

Warning
Clothing articles on the coat hooks can ob-struct the view while driving. There is a risk of accident. When suspending clothing articles from the coat hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the driver’s view.

Warning
Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang lightweight objects, for instance clothing articles, from the coat hooks.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

FAQ

Q: What storage compartments are available in the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe?

A: The 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe typically comes with various storage compartments throughout the cabin.

Q: How large is the glovebox in the 2 Series Coupe?

A: The glovebox size may vary, but it usually provides ample space for storing essential items.

Q: Are there storage pockets on the doors for smaller items?

A: Yes, most models of the 2 Series Coupe come equipped with door pockets for added storage convenience.

Q: Is there a center console storage compartment?

A: The BMW 2 Series Coupe typically features a center console with storage space for items like phones, wallets, and more.

Q: Are there cupholders available in the cabin?

A: Yes, cupholders are usually provided for the convenience of both the driver and passengers.

Q: Can the center armrest be used for storage, and if so, how much space does it offer?

A: The center armrest often doubles as a storage compartment, providing extra space for various items.

Q: Is there a storage compartment under the rear seats?

A: Some models may have a storage compartment beneath the rear seats for additional storage options.

Q: Are there any hidden or secret storage compartments in the 2 Series Coupe?

A: BMW occasionally incorporates hidden or concealed storage compartments for added security and convenience.

Q: Can the rear seats be folded down to create more storage space in the trunk?

A: Depending on the specific model, the rear seats may be foldable to expand the trunk space when needed.

Q: Is there a cargo net or organizer available to keep items secure in the trunk?

A: Some models may offer optional cargo nets or organizers to help keep items in the trunk organized.

Q: Are there any storage compartments in the rear armrest for rear passengers?

A: The rear armrest may feature storage compartments for the convenience of rear-seat passengers.

Q: Can I add additional storage accessories or organizers as aftermarket options?

A: Depending on availability, you may be able to purchase aftermarket storage accessories and organizers to further customize the interior.

Q: Is there a sunglasses holder in the 2 Series Coupe?

A: Many BMW models include a sunglasses holder for storing eyewear safely.

Q: Are there USB ports or power outlets in the storage compartments for charging devices?

A: Some storage compartments may come equipped with USB ports or power outlets for charging devices.

Q: How does the storage space compare to other models in the BMW lineup?

A: The storage compartments in the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe are designed to meet the needs of its class, providing a balance between storage and interior space, but it’s recommended to compare it with other BMW models for a detailed comparison.

Useful Link

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 User Manual
https://www.bmwusa.com/owners-manuals.html
2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

2023 BMW 2 SERIES COUPE Interior equipment Guidelines

BMW-Logo

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Interior equipment

BMW-2-Series-2023

The interior of the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe is carefully made and mixes luxury and sportiness in a way that makes driving a truly captivating experience. Inside the cabin, you’ll find a balance of high-quality materials, cutting-edge technology, and well-thought-out design features that make every trip more enjoyable. The 2 Series Coupe is designed with the comfort of the driver and passengers in mind. It has a variety of seating choices, including sport seats for those who want a more exciting driving experience. The high-tech infotainment system with a large tablet that controls entertainment, navigation, and connectivity and gives you access to Apple CarPlay and Android Auto is the centerpiece of the interior. Along with these high-tech features, the 2 Series Coupe has new driver assistance systems that make driving safer and more convenient. Customizable ambient lighting adds a touch of individuality to the car. The 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe’s interior shows that the brand is committed to making an expensive and immersive place to drive. The attention to detail is clear in every part.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equip-ment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.

Additional information:
Vehicle equipment

Integrated universal remote control

Principle
The integrated universal remote control in the interior mirror can operate remote-controlled systems such as garage door openers, alarm systems or locking systems.

General information
The integrated universal remote control re-places up to three different hand-held trans-mitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-grammed with the desired functions.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the remote-controlled system near metal objects to ensure the best possible operation.

Safety information 

Warning
The operation of remote-controlled systems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may result in injury, for example, body parts becoming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the travel path of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also fol-low the safety information for the hand-held transmitter.

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Interior-equipment-FIG-1Compatibility
If this icon is printed on the packaging or in the operating instructions of the remote-controlled system, the system is generally compatible with the integrated uni-versal remote control.
Additional questions are answered by:

  • An authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
  • www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.
An authorized service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop will be glad to answer additional questions.

Control elements on the interior mirrorBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Interior-equipment-FIG-2

  • Buttons, arrow 1.
  • LED, arrow 2.
  • Hand-held transmitter of the remote-con-trolled system, arrow 3.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Programming the integrated

universal remote control
Functional requirement
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be fully charged at the time of programming to ensure an optimal range of the integrated universal remote control.

Programming individual buttons

  1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-controlled system.
  2. Turn on standby state.
  3. Select desired button on the interior mirror:
    • Program available button:
      Press the button.
    • Program already assigned button: Press and hold the button for approx. 20 seconds.
      The LED on the interior mirror will slowly begin flashing orange.
  4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the remote-controlled system approx. 1 to
    12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror.
    The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.
  5. Press and hold the button on the hand-held transmitter.
    Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter but-ton for 2 seconds.
  6. The LED can illuminate in different ways:
    • The LED lights up green: programming completed.
      Release button.
    • The LED flashes green rapidly: the hand-held transmitter was detected but programming is not complete.
      Press and hold the button on the interior mirror for approx. 2 seconds. Perform this procedure three times.
      If the integrated universal remote con-trol remains nonoperational, continue with the special features for rolling code radio systems.
    • LED does not illuminate green after 60 seconds: programming not com-pleted.
      Repeat steps 3 to 5.

Special feature of the rolling code wireless system
For systems with a rolling code radio system, the integrated universal remote control and the system also have to be synchronized.
Refer to information on synchronization in the operating instructions of the remote-controlled system.

  1. Program the desired button on the interior mirror.
  2. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the remote-controlled system, such as on the garage door.
    You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
    Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second person.
  3. Press and hold the programmed button on the interior mirror for approx. 3 seconds. If necessary, repeat this step up to three times in order to end synchronization. Once synchronization is complete, the program-med function will be carried out.

Operation

After programming, the remote-controlled sys-tem can be operated with the button on the interior mirror.

Press and hold the desired button of the re-mote-controlled system within range until the function is triggered.
The LED on the interior mirror is continuously illuminated green during the transmission of the radio signal.

Deleting a button assignment
The button assignment cannot be deleted indi-vidually.
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green rapidly.
All stored button assignments will be deleted.

Sun visor

Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.

Glare shield from the side

Folding the sun visor out

  1. Fold the sun visor down.
  2. Detach it from the holder and swing it to- ward the side window.
  3. Shift it back to the desired position.
    Folding the sun visor in
    Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun visor.
    Vanity mirror
    A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-hind a cover.

Sockets

Principle
The socket can be used for electronic devi-ces when the standby or drive-ready state is switched on.

General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors.

Safety information

Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, such as portable navigation de-vices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car’s interior dur-ing unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag’s area of unfolding.

NOTICE
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V electrical system. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the jump-start terminals in the en-gine compartment.

NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Insert the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

Front center console

  1. Press on the cover.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Interior-equipment-FIG-3
  2. A socket is located between the cup hold- ers. Detach the cover. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Interior-equipment-FIG-4

USB port

General information
Follow the information regarding the connec-tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the section on USB connections.

Additional information:
USB connections, see Owner’s Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication.

In the center armrestBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Interior-equipment-FIG-5

A USB port is located in the center armrest. Properties:

  • USB port Type C.
  • For charging mobile devices.
  • Charge current: max. 3 A.

In the front center console 

NOTICE
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g., large USB connectors, may block or damage the cover when it is being opened or closed. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the cover is clear while opening and closing it.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Interior-equipment-FIG-6

Press on the cover.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Interior-equipment-FIG-7

A USB port is located in the center console.

Properties:

  • USB port Type A.
  • For charging mobile devices and for data transfer.
  • Charge current: max. 1.5 A.

Wireless charging tray

Principle
The wireless charging tray allows wireless charging of mobile phones and other mobile devices certified according to the Qi standard.

General information
When inserting the device to be charged, en-sure that there are no objects between the de-vice to be charged and the wireless charging tray.
The charging process is shown by the charge indicator on the control display.

Safety information

Warning
When charging a device that meets the Qi standard in the wireless charging tray, any metal objects located between the device and the tray can become very hot. Placing storage devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards, cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal transmission, between the device and the tray may impair the card func-tion. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-age to property. When charging mobile devi-ces, make sure there are no objects between the device and the tray.

Overview

Tray in the center console:BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Interior-equipment-FIG-8

  1. LED
  2. Storage area

Functional requirements 

  • The device to be charged must be certified according to the Qi standard.
  • Standby state is switched on.
  • The mobile phone must not exceed the maximum size of approximately 6.0 x 3.1 x 0.7 in/154.5 x 80 x 18 mm.
  • Use only protective sleeves and covers up to a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm; otherwise, the charging function may be impaired.
  • The mobile phone to be charged is located in the center of the tray. The mobile phone display is pointing upwards.

Inserting the mobile phone

  1. Open the tray cover.
  2. Place the mobile phone-centered in the tray with the display facing up.
  3. Close the tray cover.

LED displays

Color Meaning 

  • Blue The mobile phone is charging.
    The blue LED stays illuminated once the inserted mobile phone with Qi capability is fully charged.
  • Orange
    The mobile phone is not charging.
    The temperature of the mobile phone may be too high or a foreign object may be in the charging tray.
  • Red
    The mobile phone is not charging.
    Contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Forgotten warning

General information

A warning can be given if a Qi-certified mobile phone was forgotten in the wireless charging tray when leaving the vehicle.
The forgotten warning is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Activating the forgotten warning function

  1. MENU”
  2. Vehicle apps”
  3. System settings”
  4. Wireless charging tray”
  5. Mobile phone reminder”

System limits
The charge current may be reduced or the charging process may be temporarily interrupted in the following situations:

  • Due to excessive temperatures on the surface of the tray and mobile phone.
  • If there are objects between the mobile phone and the wireless charging tray.
  • By settings on the mobile phone, for instance for charging. Follow the relevant instructions on the controlled display and in the instructions for the mobile phone, if applicable.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

FAQ

Q: What are the standard interior features in the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe?

A: The standard interior features may include premium materials, sport seats, a multifunction steering wheel, and the latest infotainment system.

Q: Are there different trim levels available with distinct interior equipment options?

A: Yes, BMW typically offers various trim levels, each with different interior equipment and customization options.

Q: Can I choose from different interior color schemes and materials?

A: BMW often provides a range of interior color options, including leather, cloth, and synthetic materials, allowing you to customize the cabin to your preferences.

Q: What type of infotainment system is integrated into the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe?

A: The 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe may feature the latest iDrive infotainment system, which includes a touchscreen display and intuitive controls.

Q: Is there a touchscreen display, and how large is it?

A: The touchscreen display size may vary depending on the trim level and options chosen but is typically around [insert inches].

Q: Does the car come with smartphone connectivity options?

A: Yes, the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe is likely to offer smartphone integration with Apple CarPlay and Android Auto.

Q: What kind of audio system is available in the BMW 2 Series Coupe?

A: The car may offer a premium sound system from brands like Harman Kardon or Bowers & Wilkins, depending on the selected options.

Q: Are there advanced driver assistance features that enhance the interior experience?

A: The BMW 2 Series Coupe may come equipped with advanced driver assistance features like adaptive cruise control, lane departure warning, and more.

Q: How comfortable are the seats, and are there options for sport seats?

A: The BMW 2 Series Coupe often offers comfortable seats, and you can typically choose sport seats as an option for a more athletic driving experience.

Q: How spacious is the interior in terms of legroom and cargo space?

A: The interior space can vary, but BMW typically provides a good balance of legroom and cargo capacity for a coupe.

Q: Is there an available panoramic sunroof or moonroof option?

A: Yes, you may have the option to add a panoramic sunroof or moonroof to the BMW 2 Series Coupe for added natural light and ventilation.

Q: Can I customize the cabin’s atmosphere with ambient lighting?

A: BMW often offers customizable ambient lighting options to create different moods within the cabin.

Q: Does the car have a heads-up display (HUD)?

A: The 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe may offer an optional heads-up display that projects important information onto the windshield.

Q: Can I control interior functions using voice commands or gesture control?

A: BMW typically includes voice recognition and gesture control systems to interact with various interior functions.

Q: Are there any unique interior features or innovations specific to the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe?

A: It’s worth checking for any new and unique interior features or innovations that BMW has introduced for the 2023 model year.

Useful Link

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 User Manual
https://www.bmwusa.com/owners-manuals.html
2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

2023 BMW 2 SERIES COUPE Driving comfort And Climate control System

BMW-Logo

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Driving comfort And Climate control

BMW-2-Series-2023

Even though the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe is a great example of athletic ability, it is also a haven of driving comfort and climate control. Its dual-zone climate control system allows both the driver and the front passenger to create their own unique atmosphere, making each trip feel like it was made just for them. Whether it’s the quick reaction of the system to reach the desired temperature or the luxury of seats that can be ventilated in warmer weather and heated in colder weather, comfort is the main focus. The car has great sound insulation, which makes the cabin a quiet place to relax even in busy cities. And when the seasons change and the windows fog up, the quick-acting defoggers keep the windows perfectly clear, making sure that nothing gets in the way of the driving experience. The way the 2 Series Coupe combines dynamic speed with such careful attention to comfort and climate shows that BMW wants to give its customers more than just a ride.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Driving comfort

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.

Additional information:
Vehicle equipment

Chassis components 

The chassis components are optimized for the vehicle and its application range and thereby ensure the best possible driving experience.

Adaptive M chassis

Principle
The Adaptive M chassis is an intelligent, controllable sport chassis.
The chassis reduces body movements with a sporty driving style or on an uneven road.

General information
The intelligent control of the chassis increases the driving dynamics and driving comfort depending on the road condition and driving style.

Setting
The system offers different shock absorber settings ranging from comfortable travel to sporty driving.
The shock absorbers are adjusted depending on the selected driving mode as well as the road condition and driving style.

Additional information: 
Driving Dynamics Control

Performance Control 

Performance Control enhances the agility of the vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked individually when a sporty driving style is used.

Drive sound

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, the drive sound can be ad-justed.

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4. “Drivetrain and chassis”
  5. “IconicSounds”
  6. Select the desired setting.

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Climate control

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equip-ment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.

Additional information:
Vehicle equipment

Air conditioning control

Overview

Functions via climate control menu

Icon Function 

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-1Automatic program.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-2Temperature.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-3Air conditioning.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-4Maximum cooling.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-5Air recirculation mode.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-6Automatic recirculated-air control.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-7Fresh air.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-8Air flow.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-9Air distribution.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-10SYNC program.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-11Seat heating.

The functions can also be operated via voice, such as Temperature.

Buttons, automatic climate control  BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-12

Icon Function 

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-13Defrost function.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-14Rear window defroster.

Buttons, rear automatic climate controlBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-

Icon Function

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-1Automatic program.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-23Temperature.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-17Air distribution.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-18Seat heating.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-19Switching off.

View on the control display  BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-20

  1. Toolbar
  2. Climate control functions, driver’s side
  3. Climate control functions
  4. Climate control functions, passenger’s side 5 Climate control bar

Calling up climate control functions
Via climate control bar:
“CLIMATE MENU” tap in the center of the cli-mate control bar.
Or:

  1. MENU”
  2. Vehicle apps”
  3. Climate control”

Turning the air conditioning system on/off

  1. CLIMATE MENU”
  2. “All climate functions”
  3. Select the desired setting.

The complete air conditioning system is turned on/off with the last settings.
When the air conditioning system is turned on, individual climate control functions can be turned off.

Turning rear automatic climate control on/off

Functional requirements 

  • Automatic climate control is turned on.
  • Defrost function is deactivated.

Turning rear automatic climate control on/off

Via iDrive 

  1. “CLIMATE MENU”
  2. “Settings”
  3. “Rear climate control”
  4. Activating/deactivating”Rear climate control”.

The rear automatic climate control can be ac-tivated with standard setting for temperature and AUTO program:
“Activate with default settings”

Switching on using the button
Press one of the following buttons:

  • Temperature.
  • Automatic program.
  • Air distribution, manual.

Switching off using the button

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-19Press the button.

Locking the rear automatic climate control operating elements

  1. “CLIMATE MENU”
  2.  “Settings”
  3. “Rear climate control”
  4. “Lock rear climate control”

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Automatic program

Principle
The automatic program ensures a comforta-ble climate, which can be modified with the desired temperature and individual settings.
The automatic program cools, ventilates or heats the vehicle interior automatically.

General information
Depending on the equipment, the automatic program provides the best possible settings for climate control functions depending on the outside temperature, interior temperature, sunlight, seat occupancy and the desired tem-perature setting:

  • Air flow.
  • Air distribution.
  • Temperature.
  •  Seat heating.

The automatic program takes seat occupancy into account, regulating the climate in an en-ergy-efficient manner that is tailored to the oc-cupants.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-trols the automatic program in order to prevent window condensation to the extent possible.
Turning the automatic program on/off

  1. CLIMATE MENU”
  2. Automatic program”
  3. Select the desired setting.

Switching the rear climate control automatic program on/off
Using the button

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-1Press the button.
The LED of the button is illuminated when the automatic program is turned

Setting the intensity
When the automatic program is activated, the intensity of individual climate control functions can be individually adjusted.
Each climate control function has multiple lev-els that can be adjusted individually, such as:

  • “LOW”
  • “MEDIUM”
  • “HIGH”

Each level has a specific control range of the intensity.
Based on the stored data models, the intensi-ties are dynamically adjusted while driving. It is not necessary to manually change the desired intensity to lower or higher levels while driving.

Example of function
When the automatic program is turned on, the intensity of the seat heating can be adjusted:

  1. CLIMATE MENU” tap in the center of the climate control bar.
  2. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-21Seat heating.
  3. Select desired setting, for example, “HIGH”.

The individually selected settings of the cli-mate control functions are stored and auto-matically set up again, such as after the vehicle is started again.

Display
The indicator in the climate control bar pro-vides information about the temperature differ-ence between the configured desired tempera-ture and current interior temperature.

  • The red or blue bar next to the temperature display indicates the progress of heating or cooling.
  • The desired interior temperature is reached as soon as the bar is no longer displayed.

Active climate control functions such as seat heating are displayed as icons in the climate control bar.
Active climate control functions are highlighted in color in the climate control menu.

Temperature

Principle
The automatic climate control cools or heats to the configured temperature and then keeps the temperature constant.

General information
Do not rapidly switch between different tem-perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-just the set temperature.

Setting the temperature

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-22The temperature can be set in-dividually for driver and front passenger in the air conditioning bar.

Set the desired temperature:

  • + Raise the temperature.
  • Lower temperature.

Configuring the temperature adjustment
When the automatic program is switched on, the heating and cooling speed can be adjusted as follows:

  •  “BALANCED”.
    This setting enables a smooth, low-noise adjustment of the interior temperature.
  •  “DYNAMIC”.
    The setting enables a quick adjustment of the interior temperature with a high air volume.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Setting the rear automatic climate control temperature

Via iDrive

  1. CLIMATE MENU”
  2. Settings”
  3. Rear climate control”
  4. Set the desired temperature.

Using the button
BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-23Press the left or right button side to set the desired temperature.

Adjusting the upper body temperature

General information
The air temperature in the upper body area can be adjusted.
This does not change the set interior tempera-ture for the driver and front passenger.

Adjusting the upper body temperature

  • CLIMATE MENU”
  • Settings”
  • Temp. adjustment upper body”
  • Increase or decrease temperature.

Air conditioning

Principle
The air in the interior will be cooled and dehu-midified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

Functional requirement
Standby or drive readiness is switched on.
Switching the cooling function on/off

  1. CLIMATE MENU”
  2. A/C”
  3. Select the desired setting.

Depending on the weather, the windshield and the side windows may fog up briefly when drive-ready state is switched on.
When using the cooling mode, condensation that will exit below the vehicle.

Maximum cooling

Principle
The function enables a quick and intense cool-ing of the interior.

General information
The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air flow and recirculated air mode.

Rear automatic climate control:
The function is automatically activated in the rear when the SYNC program is turned on.

Functional requirement
The function is available at an outside temper-ature above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the drive-ready state switched on.

Turning maximum cooling on/off 

  1. CLIMATE MENU”
  2. MAX A/C”
  3. Select the desired setting.

Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body area. Open the vents.

Air recirculation mode

Principle
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-tants in the immediate environment by tempo-rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the interior air.

General information
If there is window condensation, turn off the air recirculation.
When the air recirculation is turned off, outside air is directed into the interiorIn the automatic recirculated-air control, out-side air is drawn in or the interior air is circu-lated, depending on the outside air quality.
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh air or the circulated interior air in recirculation mode.

Turning air recirculation on/off

  1. CLIMATE MENU”
  2. The current operating mode is displayed in the toolbar. Select the desired setting in the toolbar:
    • Air recirculation”
    • Fresh air”
    • Auto air recirculation”

Depending on vehicle equipment, air recircula-tion will turn off automatically based on ambi-ent conditions in order to prevent window con-densation.

Air flow

General information
The air flow generated by the blower can be adjusted as needed.

Adjusting the air flow 

  1. CLIMATE MENU”
  2. Air flow.
  3. Select the desired setting.

The air flow may be reduced to preserve the vehicle battery.
Adjusting the air volume of the rear climate control

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-25Pressing the upper or lower side of the button repeatedly: decrease or in-crease air flow.

The selected air flow is shown on the climate control display.

Air distribution settings

General information
The air distribution can be adjusted as re-quired in manual mode.

Adjusting the air distribution 

  1. CLIMATE MENU”
  2. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-26Air distribution.
  3. Select the desired setting.
    The selected air distribution is displayed.

Adjusting the air distribution of the rear climate control

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-27Press the button repeatedly. Select the desired setting.

The selected air distribution is shown on the climate control display.

SYNC program

Principle
When the SYNC program is activated, the set-tings for the driver’s side can be transferred to the passenger’s side and to the rear.

General information
The following settings can be transferred:

  • Temperature.
  • Air distribution.
  •  Automatic program.

Turning the SYNC program on/off

  1. CLIMATE MENU”
  2. SYNC”
  3. Select the desired setting.

The program is switched off automatically if the settings on the front passenger side or in the rear are changed.

Defrost function

Principle
With the defrost function, ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side windows.

General information
The air flow and air temperature are automati-cally optimized for the removal of ice and con-densation.
The air distribution is directed toward the windshield and the front side windows.
If there is window condensation, turn on the automatic program to take advantage of the condensation sensor. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
When the defrost function is turned on, the rear automatic climate control is deactivated to pro-vide maximum performance.

Turning the defrost function on/off 

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-13Press the button.
The LED of the button is illuminated when the system is switched on.

Rear window defroster

Principle
With the rear window defroster, ice and con-densation are quickly removed from the rear window.

Functional requirement
Standby or drive readiness is switched on.

Turning the rear window defroster on/off

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-14Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with rear win-dow defroster switched on.

The rear window defroster switches off auto-matically after a certain period of time.

Seat heating

General information
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-nutes after an intermediate stop, the functions are turned on automatically with the tempera-ture that was last set.

Additional information:
Automatic program
Automatic climate control

Overview BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-28

Turning the seat heating on/off

  1. CLIMATE MENU” tap in the center of the climate control bar.
  2. Seat heating.
  3. Select the desired setting.
    When ECO PRO is activated, the heater output is reduced.
    Additional information:
    ECO PRO

Ventilation

Principle
The ventilation system offers individual ranges of adjustment for direct or indirect ventilation to optimize the air flows in the vehicle.

General information
Open the air vents and position them to ensure effective climate control.
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend-ing on the set desired temperature.

Front ventilation BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-29

  • Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-row 1.
  • Thumbwheel for the variable adjustment of the air flow on the vents, arrows 2.

Ventilation in the rearBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-30

  • Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-row 1.
  • Thumbwheel for variable opening and clos-ing of the air vents, arrow 2.

Setting the ventilation
Depending on the desired ventilation, align the air flow directly or indirectly toward the passengers.

Air quality

General information
The air quality in the interior is improved by the following components:

  • Emission tested passenger compartment.
  • Interior filter.
  • Air conditioning system to control the temperature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.
  • Pre-ventilation.

Interior filter
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh air or the circulated interior air in recirculation mode.

Depending on the equipment:

  • Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in-flowing air.
  • Nano-particle emissions are reduced.
  • Gaseous pollutants are filtered.
  • Microbial particles, viruses and allergens are filtered.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends having the interior filter changed during vehicle maintenance.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Pre-ventilation 

Principle
The car’s interior can be cooled or heated before driving off with the pre-ventilation. Depending on set temperature and ambient temperature, the car’s interior is ventilated or pos-sibly heated using the residual engine heat.

General information
The system can be switched on and off directly or via a preset departure time.
The activation time is determined based on the outside temperature. The system promptly switches on before the selected departure time.
The system switches off automatically after a certain period of time. The system continues to run for some time after being switched off.

Functional requirements 

  • The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.
  • The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged. If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the maximum activation time to save the vehi-cle battery. The system will be available again after the engine is started or after a short trip.
  • Time and date are set correctly.
  • The ventilation air vents are open.

Switching pre-ventilation on/off
Turning on/turning off via iDrive

  1. CLIMATE MENU”
  2. “Settings”
  3. “Pre-ventilation”
  4. Select the desired setting.

Departure time

General information
Different departure times can be set to ensure a comfortable interior temperature in the vehi-cle at the time of departure.

  •  One-time departure time: the time can be set.
    The system is switched on once.
  • Departure time with weekday: time and day of the week can be set.
    On the desired weekdays, the system will be switched on before the set departure time.
    The departure time is preselected in two steps:
  • Set departure times.
  •  Activate departure times.

A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-tween setting/activating the departure time and the planned departure time to allow a suf-ficient period of time for the climate control.

Setting the departure time

  1. CLIMATE MENU”
  2. Settings”
  3. Pre-ventilation”
  4. Departure plan”
  5. Select the desired departure time.
  6. Set the desired departure time.
  7. Select day of the week, if needed.

Activating the departure time
To turn on the pre-ventilation prior to a departure time, the respective departure time must be activated beforehand.

  1. CLIMATE MENU”
  2. Settings”
  3. Pre-ventilation”
  4. Departure plan”
  5. Activate the desired departure time.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Display

Icon Description 

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-24Icon in the center console at the top.
Icon lights up: a departure time is activated.
Icon flashes: Pre-ventila-tion is switched on.

Activating with BMW app
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a suitable BMW app with remote functionality can be used to turn on the pre-ventilation at a preset departure time or immediately.

Pre-conditioning through Remote Engine Start

Principle
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car’s inte-rior prior to start of the trip to a comfortable temperature. The system automatically cools, vents, and heats depending on the interior, ex-ternal, and set temperature. Snow and ice may be removed more easily.
The system starts the engine automatically and allows it to run for a limited period of time.

Safety information

DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pol-lute the area in and around the vehicle or penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are colorless and odorless. In enclosed areas or areas with in-sufficient ventilation, exhaust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation. Do not switch on stationary climate control in enclosed areas or areas with insufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed garages.

Warning
When stationary climate control is in opera-tion, high temperatures can occur underneath the body, for instance caused by the exhaust system. If combustible materials, such as leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, these materi-als can ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts during sta-tionary climate control operation, e.g. leaves, grass, gas, gasoline, oil or other combustible objects.

Functional requirements

  •  The vehicle is in idle state or standby state and not in drive-ready state.
  • Battery is sufficiently charged.
  • The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.
  • Hood is closed.
  • Make sure that the vehicle’s date and time are set correctly.
  • Air vents are opened.

Enabling the automatic engine start function
The automatic engine start must be enabled before using the system. Otherwise, the en-gine cannot switch on automatically to clima-tize the car’s interior.

Via iDrive:

  • CLIMATE MENU”
  • Settings”
  • Pre-conditioning”
  • Remote Engine Start”
  • Start engine for climate cont.”
  • Confirm the disclaimer.

Turning on/turning off the pre-conditioning

General information
The system switches off automatically after max. 15 minutes for safety reasons.
The system can be switched on a maximum of two times in a row.
The system will be available again as soon as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-tivated again.

Switching on via iDrive 

  1. 1. “CLIMATE MENU”
    2. “Settings”
    3. “Pre-conditioning”
    4. “Start now”

Switching on/off via vehicle key
The system can be switched on and off using the vehicle key.
BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate-control-FIG-30Press the button on the vehicle key three times within 1 second.

After operating the vehicle key, it will take approximately 3 seconds until the engine is switched on. To switch off the system, press the button again three times.

Switching off with the Start/Stop button
The system can be switched off directly as fol-lows: pressing the Start/Stop button, without operating the brake pedal.
Climate control for departure time

General information
Scheduled departure times can be set up in the system to ensure a comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at the time of depar-ture.

  • One-time departure time: the time of the scheduled departure can be set.
    The system is switched on once.
  •  Departure time with weekday: time and day of the week of the scheduled departure can be set.
    The departure time is preselected in two steps:
  •  Set departure times.
  • Activate departure times.

The system is activated automatically a few minutes before the set departure time. The system remains switched on for a short time after the set departure time.
For safety reasons, the air conditioning can only be activated once for the departure time.
The system will be available again as soon as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-tivated again.
Observe the information about the intended use of the vehicle.

Additional information:
For Your Own Safety

Setting the departure time

  1. CLIMATE MENU”
  2. “Settings”
  3. “Pre-conditioning”
  4. “Departure plan”
  5. Set the departure time.
  6. Select day of the week, if needed.

Activating the departure time

  1. “CLIMATE MENU”
  2. “Settings”
  3. “Pre-conditioning”
  4. Departure plan”
  5. Activate the desired departure time.

Display

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-31In the instrument cluster:
The engine runs for the purpose of operating the pre-conditioning. The vehicle is not ready to drive.

Icon Description

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-32Icon in the center console at the top.
    Icon lights up: heating op-eration is switched on.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Climate control-FIG-24Icon in the center console at the top.
    Icon lights up: a departure time is activated.
    Icon flashes: pre-condition-ing is switched on.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle
The activation of the system is confirmed by flashing twice. The parking lights are switched on as long as the system is switched on.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

FAQ

How does the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe’s automatic climate control work?

The system maintains a preset temperature by automatically adjusting heating, cooling, and ventilation levels based on sensor feedback.

Is there a dual-zone climate control feature?

Yes, the 2 Series Coupe often comes with dual-zone climate control, allowing the driver and front passenger to set individual temperature preferences.

Does the vehicle come with heated seats?

Heated front seats are typically available, either as a standard feature or an optional add-on depending on the trim level.

Is ventilated or cooled seat functionality available?

Some higher-end models or packages may offer ventilated seats for enhanced comfort during warmer conditions.

How does the automatic air-recirculation function operate?

The system detects pollutants or odors outside the car and automatically switches to recirculation mode, ensuring cabin air remains fresh.

Is there an integrated air ionizer or air quality system?

Some premium models or packages might offer an air ionizer or advanced air filtration system to enhance cabin air quality.

How effective is the car’s insulation against exterior noise?

BMW is known for its advanced sound insulation techniques, ensuring a quiet and serene driving experience in the 2 Series Coupe.

Are there memory settings for climate preferences?

Some trims may feature memory settings that can recall preferred climate settings for multiple drivers.

How quickly does the climate control system reach the desired temperature?

BMW’s efficient climate control systems are designed to achieve desired temperatures swiftly, ensuring rapid cabin comfort.

Does the vehicle feature a heated steering wheel?

Depending on the package or trim, a heated steering wheel option may be available for enhanced cold-weather comfort.

Are rear passengers provided with their own climate control or vents?

Rear vents are typically present, but dedicated climate control for rear passengers may vary based on the model and package.

Does the Coupe come with a sunroof? If so, does it have a climate control impact?

Many models offer a sunroof option. While it can influence cabin temperatures when open, the climate control system compensates to maintain desired comfort levels.

How does the car ensure windshield and window clarity in cold or humid conditions?

The vehicle is equipped with defoggers and a defrost function, ensuring clear visibility under various conditions.

Is there any special climate control feature for allergy sufferers?

Advanced filtration systems, which may be present in some trims or packages, can help reduce allergens and improve cabin air quality.

Can the climate control be operated remotely or through a mobile app?

Depending on the connectivity features offered, some models might allow remote operation of certain functions, including climate control, via a mobile app.

Useful Link

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 User Manual
https://www.bmwusa.com/owners-manuals.html
2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

2023 BMW 2 SERIES COUPE Parking Guidelines

BMW-Logo

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Parking

BMW-2-Series-2023

Vehicle features and options

With its advanced parking features, the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe changes what it means to drive in a city. It makes the usually difficult job of parking in a city a breeze. With its cutting-edge technology, the Coupe is not only an elegant and fast car, but also a shining example of smart design. With the Park Distance Control (PDC) and the rear-view camera, parking problems are easily turned into easy jobs. The advanced Parking Assistant is more than just a guide. It can find good parking spots and move the car into them almost by itself. Also, Cross-Traffic Alert and a possible Surround View system give drivers a better sense of their surroundings, making it easier to park in busy city streets or tight spaces. With this mix of new ideas and useful features, the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe is not just a car for the open road, but also a master of the city.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Additional information:
Vehicle Equipment

Parking assistance systems 

General information
The parking assistance systems include different individual systems. The individual systems provide support with assistance functions, sensors and different camera views when parking and maneuvering or driving in reverse.
Additional information:

  • Rearview camera
  • Automatic camera perspective
  • Side view
  • 3D view
  • Car wash view
  • Panorama View
  • Door opening angle
  • Remote 3D View
  • Park Distance Control
  • Active Park Distance Control
  • Automatic Parking Assistant
  • Back-up Assistant

Safety information

Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Button in the vehicle BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (1)

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (2)Park assistance button
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (3)Panorama View

Sensors
The parking assistance systems are controlled by the following sensors:

  • Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bumpers.
  • Ultrasonic sensors, side.
  • Radar sensors, side, rear.
  • Front camera.
  • Top view cameras.
  • Rearview camera.
    Additional information:
    Sensors of the vehicle

Operating concept

The camera-based individual systems are operated with the function bars on the control display. The camera views can be viewed by selecting the appropriate icon.
Some parking assistance systems can be set individually in the Park menu.

Calling up Park menu

Via Parking Assistant button 

  1. Press the button.
  2. “Settings”
  3. Select the desired settings.

Via iDrive

  1. MENU”
  2. Vehicle apps”
  3. Driving settings”
  4. Driver Assistance”
  5. Parking and maneuvering”
  6. Select the desired settings.

Display

Principle
The parking assistance systems view helps with parking and maneuvering by displaying the Park Distance Control and a variety of camera perspectives.

General information
Depending on the equipment, one or more cameras capture the area from different selectable perspectives.
Depending on the view, the vehicle’s surroundings or a part of it is depicted.
Depending on the national market version, the automatic camera perspective or the rearview camera is displayed.

Turning the display on/off

General information
The parking assistance systems view switches off automatically when driving forwards or if a certain distance or speed is exceeded.

With reverse
When drive readiness is switched on, the dis-play is automatically switched on if selector lever position R is engaged.

Via Parking Assistant button 

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (2)Press the button.

Display on the control display

General information
Depending on vehicle equipment and on the activated parking assistance system, the con-trol display will vary.

Without Parking Assistant Plus BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (5)

  1. Toolbar, left
  2. Camera image
  3. Selection window
  4. Toolbar, right

With Parking Assistant Plus

  1. Toolbar, left
  2. Camera image
  3. Selection window
  4. Automatic camera perspective
  5. Side view
  6. Rearview camera
  7. Toolbar, right

Toolbar, left
Different views can be selected using the left toolbar depending on vehicle equipment.

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (7) “Rear view camera”
    The rearview camera image is displayed.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (8)“Only park. sensors”

Icon Meaning 

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (11)No search for Automatic Parking Assistant offers.
    Automatic Parking Assistant has failed.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (12)Search for Automatic Parking As-sistant offers is active.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (13)Automatic Parking Assistant: if the icon is green, the Automatic Parking Assistant is active. The system as-sumes vehicle control.
    Back-up Assistant: if the icon is green, the Back-up Assistant is ac-tive. The system takes over the steering.

Additional displays

General information
Additional displays can be shown in the cam-era image of the display of the parking assis-tance systems, e.g., parking aid lines, to make parking and maneuvering easier.

Turning additional displays on/off
Several additional displays can be activated at the same time.

Via Parking Assistant button 

  1. Enable the camera image.
  2. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (4)Settings”
  3. Select the desired settings.

Parking aid linesBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (14)

Pathway lines help estimate the space re-quired when parking and maneuvering on level roads.
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements depending on the steering-wheel angle.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (15)

Turning circle lines can only be superimposed on the camera image together with pathway lines.
The lines show the course of the smallest pos-sible turning circle on a level road.
Only one turning circle line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-gle.

Using parking aid lines 

  1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning circle line leads to within the limits of the parking space.
  2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the green pathway line covers the corre-sponding turning circle line.

Obstacle markingBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (16)

Obstacles are detected by the sensors.
The obstacles detected by the Park Distance Control are shown by marks in the camera image.
Colored gradients for the obstacle markings in green, yellow and red indicate the distances.

Functional limitations
The system can be used only to a limited ex-tent in the following situations:

  • With a door open.
  • With open cargo area.
  • With exterior mirrors folded in.

Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the camera image identify areas that are currently not shown, such as an open door.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

System limits

Safety information

Warning
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or it may react too late or in a manner that is not consistent with normal use. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner’s Manual regarding the scope of the system’s operation and limi-tations.

System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle

Non-visible areas
Because of the camera angle, the areas under the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.

Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the system.
The objects displayed on the Control Display may be closer than they appear. Do not esti-mate the distance to the objects on the control display.
Protruding cargo or a rear-mounted luggage rack can limit the detection range of the cam-era.

Malfunction
A camera failure is displayed on the Control Display.
The detection range of the failed camera is shown shaded on the control display.

Rearview camera

Principle
The rearview camera helps when reverse parking and maneuvering. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.
Additional views can be shown on the display, e.g., parking aid lines and obstacle markings.

General information
Follow the information in the “Parking assis-tance systems” chapter.

Functional requirements

  • The trunk is fully closed.
  • The camera area is clean and clear.

Deactivated rearview camera
When the rearview camera is deactivated, for instance when the trunk is open, the camera image is displayed with gray shading.

Automatic camera perspective

Principle
The automatic camera perspective shows a steering-dependent view in the respective driv-ing direction.
This perspective adapts to the respective driv-ing situation.

General information
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view changes to a fixed display of the area in
front of or behind the bumper or, if necessary, changes to side protection.
When the reverse gear is engaged, the automatic camera perspective is exited if necessary and the rearview camera view is displayed.
If necessary, select the automatic camera perspective when reverse gear is engaged. The automatic camera perspective will then be maintained for the current parking operation.
Follow the information in the “Parking assistance systems” chapter.

Side protection

Principle
The side Park Distance Control is automatically displayed when the automatic camera perspective is turned on. The function shows obstacles located next to the vehicle. .

General information
Follow the information in the “Parking assistance systems” chapter.

Display BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (17)

To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-hicle.

  • No marks: no obstacles were detected.
  • Color marks: warning against detected ob-stacles.

System limits
The system only displays stationary obstacles that were previously detected by sensors while passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obsta-cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand-still, the marks are not shown anymore in the display after a certain time. The area next to the vehicle must be newly captured.

Side view

Principle
The side view helps when positioning the vehi-cle at the curb or when other obstacles are on the side by displaying the side surroundings.

General information
The side view looks from rear to front and, in case of danger, focuses automatically on pos-sible obstacles.
The side view can be selected for the right or left vehicle side.
Follow the information in the “Parking assis-tance systems” chapter.

3D view

Principle
When 3D view is selected, a circle is displayed on the control display.
Specified perspectives can be selected on the circle.

General information
The current perspective is marked with a cam-era icon.
To exit the function, select another camera function in the left toolbar.
Follow the information in the “Parking assis-tance systems” chapter.

Car wash view 

Principle
The car wash view helps when driving into a car wash.

General information
Follow the information in the “Parking assis-tance systems” chapter.

Turning the car wash view on/off 

  1. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (2)Press the button.
  2. Car wash”

DisplayBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (18)

Your own lane is displayed for easier driving into a car wash.

Panorama View 

Principle
The panoramic view gives you an earlier view of crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and intersections.

General information
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected relatively late from the driver’s seat. The front camera and the rearview camera capture the area around the side of the vehicle to improve the view.
The camera image shows different levels of distortion in some areas and is thus not suita-ble for distance estimations.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the function can be used when driving forward or in re-verse.
Follow the information in the “Parking assis-tance systems” chapter.

Sensors
The system is controlled by the following cam-eras:

  • Rearview camera.
  • Front camera.

Turning the panoramic view on/off 

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (19)Press the button.

Display BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (20)

Yellow lines on the screen display identify the bumpers of your own vehicle.
Depending on the engaged selector lever posi-tion, the camera image of the rearview camera or front camera will be displayed.

Activation points

Principle
Positions at which panorama view should switch on automatically can be saved as acti-vation points.

General information
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
Depending on national-market version, the ac-tivation points can be used when driving for-ward or in reverse.
Follow instructions in the Parking assistance systems chapter.

Functional requirements

  • A GPS signal must be received.
  • A BMW ID or driver profile must be ena-bled.
  • The direction of travel, selector lever posi-tion, and vehicle angle must correspond to a stored activation point.

Storing activation points

  1. Drive the vehicle to the position where the system should switch on and stop.
  2. Press the button.
  3. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (3)Activation point”
    The current position is displayed.
  4. “Save activation point”

Activation points are stored with one of the following pieces of information if possible:

  • With the city/town.
  • With the city/town and the street.
  • With the GPS coordinates.

Using activation points
The use of activation points can be switched on and off.

  1. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (19)Press the button.
  2. Settings”
  3. GPS-based”

Displaying activation points

  1. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (19)Press the button.
  2. Manage points”
    A list of all activation points is displayed.

Editing activation points

  1. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (19)Press the button.
  2. Manage points”
    A list of all activation points is displayed.
  3. Select an activation point as needed.
  4. Select the desired setting.

Door opening angle

Principle
Depending on vehicle equipment, the door opening angle indicator is displayed automati-cally.
If obstacle marking is activated, the parking view indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the opening angles of the doors.
The system does not provide a warning of ap-proaching road users.

General information
Follow the information in the “Parking assis-tance systems” chapter.

DisplayBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (21)

The maximum opening angle of the doors is displayed in selector lever position P.

System limits
The vehicle’s surroundings are distorted in the display for technical reasons. Even if the door opening angle indicator on the control display does not overlap with any other objects, it is necessary to park carefully next to other objects.
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding objects may be closer than they appear on the Control Display.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Remote 3D View

Principle
The BMW app and the camera pictures in the parking view, such as automatic camera per-spective, enable the display of the vehicle’s surroundings on a mobile device.
The function displays a snapshot of the situa-tion.

General information
For reasons of data protection, the function can only be used three times within two hours.
Follow the information in the “Parking assis-tance systems” chapter.

Sensors
The system is controlled by the following cam-eras:

  • Front camera.
  • Top view cameras.
  •  Rearview camera.

Functional requirements

  • Data transfer must be activated.
    Data protection
  • The BMW app must be installed on the mo-bile end device.
  • ConnectedDrive countries: a BMW ID with an existing ConnectedDrive account must be activated.
    BMW ID/driver profiles

Activating/deactivating Remote 3D View
The function can be activated or deactivated individually or together with other functions.

  1. “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3. “System settings”
  4. “Data privacy”
  5. Select the desired setting.
    After the activation, Remote 3D View can be accessed in the BMW app.

Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations:

  • With a door or the cargo area open. Dark fields in the display indicate areas that are not recorded by the system.
  • With manually folded-in exterior mirrors.
  • When other camera functions are being performed in the vehicle.
  •  The vehicle moves faster than walking speed.
  • In case of missing or weak Internet connec-tion.

Park Distance Control

Principle
Park Distance Control assists with parking. Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles in front of or behind the vehicle.
Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra-sonic sensors can also be reported.

General information
The range of the system, depending on obsta-cles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-pending collision at a distance to the object of approx. 27 in/70 cm.
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic warning is issued as early as a distance to the object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
Follow the information in the “Parking assis-tance systems” chapter.

Safety information

Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning
Due to high speeds when the Park Distance Control is activated, the warning can be de-layed due to physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid driving off quickly while Park Distance Control is not yet active.

Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-sors:

  • Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-ers.
  • Ultrasonic sensors, side.

Turning Park Distance Control on/off

Turning on the system automatically
The system switches on automatically in the following situations:

  • When drive readiness is turned on when engaging selector lever position R.
  • While approaching detected obstacles if the speed is lower than approx.

2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance depends on the situation in question.
You may switch automatic activation when ob-stacles are detected on and off.

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Parking and maneuvering”
  6. “Automatic PDC activation”

Turning off the system automatically
When driving forward, the system turns off au-tomatically as needed when a certain distance or speed is exceeded.

Turning the system on/off manually

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (2)Press the button.
  • On: the LED lights up.
  • Off: the LED goes out.

If the system is manually switched on when the reverse gear is engaged, the rearview camera image is displayed.
Depending on the national-market version, the system cannot be turned off manually when the reverse gear is engaged.

Acoustic warning

General information
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an object is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a sound is heard from the rear left speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones.
When the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is sounded.
When there are objects in front of and behind the vehicle at the same time, at a distance smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating continuous tone will sound between the front and rear speakers.

The intermittent tones and the continuous tone are turned off when selector lever position P is engaged.
Depending on national-market version, the in-termittent tones are switched off after a short time when the vehicle is stationary.
If an object approaches when the vehicle is stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.

Adjusting the volume
The volume of the acoustic warning can be adjusted.

  1.  “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4.  “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Parking and maneuvering”
  6.  “PDC signal volume”
  7. Set the desired value.

Visual warning

General information
The approach to an object is displayed on the control display as soon as the system is acti-vated.
Objects that are farther away are already dis-played before a signal sounds.
The detection range of the sensors is rep-resented by shaded, ring-shaped surfaces. Green, yellow, and red markings indicate when obstacles are detected in the detection zone.
Depending on the view, pathway lines, turning circle lines and obstacle markings are shown for a better estimation of the space required.
If the vehicle is equipped with Cross Traffic Warning: the display also warns the driver of vehicles approaching from behind.
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-hicle.

Display
Depending on vehicle equipment, warnings may be displayed in front of, next to, and be-hind the vehicle.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (22)

View behind vehicle. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (23)

View next to vehicle.

  • Shaded area: detection range of sensors.
  • Gray shaded area: no obstacles were de-tected in the detection range.
  •  Colored marks in shaded area: obstacles were detected in the detection range.
  • Shaded area interrupted: the area next to the vehicle has not yet been detected.

System limits

General information
The function for protecting the vehicle sides only shows stationary obstacles that were pre-viously detected by the sensors when passing by.
The system does not detect whether an obsta-cle moves later on. When the vehicle is station-ary, the gray shaded areas on the sides are hidden after a certain time. The area on the side of the vehicle must be newly captured.
Also follow the information on system limits in the “Parking assistance systems” chapter.

Unwarranted warnings
Reaching the system limits can cause unwar-ranted warnings.
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-tance Control activation on obstacle detection.

Malfunction
An icon is displayed on the control dis-play.
The detection range of the sensors is not displayed on the control display.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the system checked by an authorized service cen-ter or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Active Park Distance Control

Principle
The Park Distance Control brake function ini-tiates emergency braking if there is an acute risk of collision.

General information
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre-vented under all circumstances.
The function is available below walking speed when driving in reverse or rolling backward.
Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the brake intervention. No emergency braking is performed.
After emergency braking to a stop, further creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro-ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly press the accelerator pedal and release as needed.
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer, the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-ble at any time.
Follow the information in the “Parking assis-tance systems” chapter.

Safety information

Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-sors:

  • Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-ers.
  • Ultrasonic sensors, side.

Turning off Active Park Distance Control temporarily
After emergency braking, the function can be temporarily turned off on the control display.

  1. “Obstacle detected. Emergency braking.”
  2. “Deactivate temporarily”
    During continued driving in this surrounding situation, no further emergency braking will occur.

The system will be turned on again automati-cally for the next drive.

Settings
It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle will be protected by the system.

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Parking and maneuvering”
  6. “Active PDC emergency braking”
  7.  Select the desired setting.

Display

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (8)As soon as the system detects an ob-stacle, an icon is displayed with a cor-responding message.

System limits

General information
Follow the system limits in the “Parking assis-tance systems” chapter.

Automatic Parking Assistant

Principle
The Automatic Parking Assistant helps you with parallel and perpendicular parking and makes driving out of parallel parking spaces easier.

Vehicle features and options
This system may not be available in the owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-tional equipment, the national-market version or the option for later enabling and software updates. This also applies to individual func-tions of the system.
Information on whether a function is currently available in the vehicle and if or when the function can be installed in the vehicle can be obtained from an authorized service center or other qualified service center.

Additional information:
Vehicle equipmenT

General information
Follow the information in the “Parking assis-tance systems” chapter.

Parking methods
The system supports the following functions: BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (24)

Reverse parking parallel to road, parallel park-ing.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (25)

Reverse parking perpendicular to the road, perpendicular parking.BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (26)

Driving out of parallel parking spaces.

Operation

The operating principle and operation of the system is divided into the following steps:

  • Parking space search.
  • Turning on.
  • Parking.
  • Driving out of parking spaces.

Parking space search is always active when the vehicle is slowly moving straight forward.
Ultrasonic sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
When the system is active, the status of the system and necessary instructions are dis-played.

Parking operation
The system calculates the best possible option for driving in or out of parking spaces with parking lines and takes control of the following functions while parking:

  • Steering.
  • Acceleration and braking.
  • Changing gears.

The parking operation when pulling in is auto-matic.
When driving out of parallel parking spaces, the vehicle maneuvers automatically until it reaches a position where it can be driven out of the parking space without further steering movements.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Safety information 

Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

NOTICE
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Watch sur-rounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Sensors
The Automatic Parking Assistant is controlled by the following sensors:

  • Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-ers.
  • Ultrasonic sensors, side.

Functional requirements

Measurement of parking spaces 

  • ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap-prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
    ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space
General information:

  •  Gap behind an object that has a min. length of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
  •  Gap between two objects, each with a mini-mum length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
  •  Minimum length of adjoining objects ap-prox. 3 ft/1 m.
    Parallel parking to the road:
  • Minimum length of gap between two ob-jects: own vehicle length plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m.
  • Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. Perpendicular parking:
  • Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
  • Minimum depth: own vehicle length.
    The depth of perpendicular parking spaces must be estimated by the driver. Due to technical limitations, the system is only able to approximate the depth of perpendicular parking spaces.

Parking operation

  • Doors and cargo area are closed.
  • Driver’s seat belt is fastened.

Leaving parking spaces

  • The vehicle was parked using the Auto-matic Parking Assistant and an object is detected in the surrounding area of the ve-hicle.
  • The vehicle was manually parked in reverse and objects in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle are detected. The distance to a de-tected curb is at least 6 inches/15 cm.
  • The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m longer than your vehicle.

Turning the Automatic Parking Assistant on/off

Via Parking Assistant button

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (2)Press the button.

The current status of the parking space search is displayed in the right toolbar.

With reverse
Engage selector lever position R.
The current status of the parking space search is displayed in the right toolbar.

Turning the signal tone on/off
The signal tone for suitable parking spaces can be turned on and off.

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Parking and maneuvering”
  6. Sound when available”

Signal tone of Park Distance Control
Depending on national-market version, an intermittent tone for Park Distance Control sounds during an automatic parking operation.
A continuous tone will sound when the dis-tance to a detected object is less than approx. 8 in/20 cm.
Parking space search

  • Parking space search is always active when driving straight forward at a speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of max. 5 ft/1.5 m to parked vehicles.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (27) The Automatic Parking Assistant is switched on and parking space search
    is activated. Search for suitable parking spaces.
  • Suitable parking spaces are displayed and an acoustic signal sounds.
  • If a parallel or perpendicular parking space is clearly detected, the system au-tomatically adjusts to the suitable parking method. If there are parking spaces for par-allel or perpendicular parking, both parking spaces are shown on the control display. The parking direction can be selected by selecting the parking space.

Parking using the Automatic Parking Assistant

  1. Press theBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (2) button or engage reverse gear.
    The parking assistance systems view is displayed.
    Parking space search is activated.
    The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are displayed on the Control Display.
  2. Select the suggested parking operation.
    BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (13)Green: the system takes control of the parking operation.
  3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-play.
    The speed can be reduced with the brake. Other interventions will cancel the system. At the end of the parking operation, selec-tor lever position P is set.
    The end of the parking operation is indi-cated on the Control Display.
  4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if needed.

Driving out of a parking space using the Automatic Parking Assistant 

  1. Turn on drive-ready state.
  2. With the vehicle at a standstill, press button or engage reverse gear.
    The parking assistance systems view is displayed.
  3. Select the desired direction for driving out of the parking space on the control display.
  4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-play.
    BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (13)Green: the system takes control of ma-neuvering.
    The speed can be reduced with the brake. Other interventions will cancel the system.
    A message will be displayed at the end of the maneuver.
  5. Make sure that the traffic situation permits driving out of parking space and driving off as usual.
    The Automatic Parking Assistant is turned off automatically.

Canceling Automatic Parking Assistant manually
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be can-celed manually at any time, e.g.:

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (2)Press the button.
  • While lightly pressing the accelerator pedal and simultaneously moving the steering wheel.
  • Press accelerator pedal.

The Automatic Parking Assistant is canceled without engaging selector lever position P. Driving can continue immediately.

Canceling Automatic Parking
Assistant automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations such as the following:

  • When the driver grasps the steering wheel or takes over steering.
  • When operating the accelerator pedal or the selector lever.
  • When setting the parking brake.
  • When unfastening the driver’s seat belt.
  • With open cargo area.
  • With open hood.
  • With the doors open.
  • During activation or intervention by driver assistance systems.
  • When changing over to another function on the Control Display.
  • When the view on the control display is overlaid with messages.
  • On snow-covered or slippery road.
  • On steep uphill or downhill grades.
  • When there are obstacles that are hard to overcome, such as curbs.
  • When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-pear.
  • With insufficient distances, which are indi-cated by Park Distance Control.
  • When a maximum number of parking at-tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-ceeded.

When the system is automatically aborted, se-lector lever position P is engaged.
A Check Control message is displayed where applicable.
Continuing the parking operation
If parking or leaving a parking space has been interrupted, the operation can be continued, if needed.
Restart the Automatic Parking Assistant and follow the instructions on the control display.

System limits

General information
Follow the system limits in the “Parking assis-tance systems” chapter.

No parking assistance
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of-fer assistance in the following situations:

  • In tight curves.
  • For diagonal parking spaces.
  • For parking spaces that are only marked with lines on the ground. The system ori-ents itself according to objects.
  • For special parking lots such as pay parking lots with automatic locking mechanisms, coin parking or mechanical parking sys-tems.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following situations:

  • On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads.
  • On slippery ground.
  •  On steep uphill or downhill grades.
  •  With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space.
  •  In case of changes to an already-measured parking space.
  • With ditches or edges, for instance an edge of a port.
  • Parking spaces that are not suitable may be detected or suitable parking spaces may not be detected at all.

Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The Automatic Parking Assistant has malfunctioned. Have the system checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Back-up assistant

Principle
The backup assistant assists when driving in reverse, for instance when driving out of tight or confusing parking or street situations.

Vehicle features and options
This system may not be available in the owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-tional equipment, the national-market version or the option for later enabling and software updates. This also applies to individual func-tions of the system.
Information on whether a function is currently available in the vehicle and if or when the function can be installed in the vehicle can be obtained from an authorized service center or another qualified service center.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment

General information
The vehicle stores the driving movements of the last distance covered. This stored distance can be driven in reverse with automated steer-ing.
The system takes over the steering. The speed must be controlled by the driver using the ac-celerator pedal and the brake.
A maximum of 164 ft/50 m are stored.
Follow the information in the “Parking assis-tance systems” chapter.

Safety information

Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

NOTICE
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Functional requirements

  • Drive forward without interruption to store the distance covered.
  • To store the distance covered, do not drive faster than 22 mph/35 km/h.
  • Dynamic Stability Control is activated.

Driving in reverse with automated steering

  1. Turn on drive-ready state.
  2. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (2)With the vehicle at a standstill, press button or engage reverse gear.
    The parking assistance systems view is displayed.
  3. “Back-Up Assistant”
    Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-play where required.
  4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and carefully drive in reverse with the accelerator pedal and the brake.
    BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (13)Green: the system takes control of steering.
    When driving in reverse, observe the vehicle’s surroundings.
    In case of obstacles, stop immediately and take over control of the vehicle. Follow the instructions for Park Distance Control.
  5. Right before the end of the stored distance covered, a signal tone will sound and a message is displayed. Stop no later than when normal road traffic is reached and take control of the vehicle, such as by shifting to forward gear.

Canceling the Back-up Assistant manually
The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis-tant can be canceled manually:

  • Via touchscreen:BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (10) “Back-Up Assistant”
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Parking- (2)Press the button.

Canceling the Back-up Assistant automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations such as the following:

  • When the driver grasps the steering wheel or takes over steering.
  • When shifting from reverse to another se-lector lever position.
  • During activation or intervention by driver assistance systems.
  • After an extended period of time when the vehicle is stationary.
  • When exiting the stored lane when revers-ing, for instance with maximum steering-wheel angle.
  • When the view on the control display is overlaid with messages.
  • In case of a slippery surface.
  • When the vehicle is rolling, such as on a slope.
  • In case of changed ambient conditions.
  • If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/9 km/h.

System limits

  • The maximum speed when driving in re-verse is limited to approx. 6 mph/9 km/h. A warning occurs at a speed of approx. 4 mph/7 km/h.
    If the maximum speed is exceeded, the function will be canceled.
  • After driving a stored distance covered with major steering-wheel angles, the function of the system will be limited for the return trip.
    Different influences can lead to side deviations when driving the stored distance covered in re-verse. For example, this includes the following factors:
  • Steering movements when the vehicle is stationary while storing the distance covered.
  • The speed is not adapted to the distance covered.
  • Road characteristics, such as gradients, in-clines or slippery road surface.
  • Greatly deviating conditions when storing and driving the route, for instance other tires or changed ambient conditions like weather.
    Also follow the information on system limits in the “Parking assistance systems” chapter.

FAQ

Does the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe come equipped with a parking assistance system?

Yes, the BMW 2 Series Coupe typically features a Parking Assistant system to help drivers with parking maneuvers.

How does the Park Distance Control (PDC) function?

PDC uses ultrasonic sensors to detect obstacles near the vehicle, alerting the driver with visual and acoustic signals based on the distance to the object.

Is there a rear-view camera in the 2 Series Coupe?

Yes, the vehicle generally includes a rear-view camera that displays the area behind the car when reversing.

Does the parking assistant offer automated parking capabilities?

The Parking Assistant can assist drivers in locating suitable spaces and can take over steering for parallel and perpendicular parking maneuvers.

How does the Cross-Traffic Alert system work during parking?

It warns the driver of approaching traffic from the sides when backing out of a parking spot or driveway.

Is there an overhead or 360-degree view camera system?

Some models or packages may offer a Surround View system, providing a bird’s-eye view of the car and its surroundings.

How effective is the system in tight parking spaces?

BMW’s parking systems are designed to be highly precise, aiding in navigating tight spaces with increased confidence.

Are there any systems to help with hill parking?

Yes, features like Hill Start Assistant can prevent the vehicle from rolling back when starting on an incline.

Can the parking sensors be manually turned off?

Generally, yes. Drivers can deactivate the sensors if they find them distracting or unnecessary.

Does the 2 Series Coupe have front parking sensors?

Most models are equipped with both front and rear parking sensors for comprehensive coverage.

How accurate is the parking space size measurement feature?

While the system is typically very accurate, it’s always recommended for drivers to visually confirm the size and safety of a parking space.

Does the car offer any assistance for exiting tight parking spaces?

The Park Distance Control and other sensors, along with the rear-view and possible Surround View cameras, can aid drivers in safely exiting tight spots.

How does the car alert the driver of obstacles during parking?

The system often uses a combination of visual cues on the infotainment display and acoustic beeps that increase in frequency as the car gets closer to an obstacle.

Is there any integration of the parking features with the infotainment system?

Yes, visual cues, camera views, and other related information are typically displayed on the main infotainment screen.

Are there any updates or improvements in the 2023 parking features compared to previous models?

BMW continually refines and enhances its systems. It’s best to refer to the official documentation or consult a BMW dealership for specific updates in the 2023 model.

Useful Link

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 User Manual
https://www.bmwusa.com/owners-manuals.html
2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

2023 BMW 2 SERIES COUPE Driver assistance systems

BMW-Logo

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Driver assistance systems

BMW-2-Series-2023

With its state-of-the-art driver assistance systems, the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe blends the driving qualities that BMW is known for with the future of road safety. This amazing piece of technology is no longer just about how exciting it is to drive. It is also about making sure that each ride is as safe as it is exciting. Every system has been carefully made to be both a defender and a guide, from the Adaptive Cruise Control, which changes speed to match the flow of traffic, to the Frontal Collision Warning, which keeps a close eye on the road. The Lane Departure and Active Lane Keeping functions are like a second set of eyes for the driver, making sure the car stays on the road. With the Parking Assistant and rear-view camera, parking and getting around in busy cities becomes almost automatic. In sum, the driver assistance systems in the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe are BMW’s idea of how modern driving should be: a symphony of performance, convenience, and unmatched safety.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equip-ment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.

Additional information:
Vehicle equipment
Speed warning

Principle
The speed warning can be used to set a speed limit. A warning will be issued when this speed limit is exceeded.

General information
Another warning occurs when the set speed limit is exceeded again after it has dropped by 3 mph/5 km/h.

Activating/deactivating the speed warning 

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Safety and warnings”
  6. “Speed warning”

Adjusting the speed

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Safety and warnings”
  6.  “Speed warning”
  7. “Warning above:”
  8. Select the desired setting.

Applying current speed as the speed warning

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Safety and warnings”
  6. “Speed warning”
  7. “Adopt current speed”

Speed Limit Info

Principle
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if necessary, the Head-up display.

General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as overhead sign posts.
Traffic signs with extra icons are considered and compared with the vehicle’s onboard data. The traffic sign will then be either displayed or ignored depending on the situation in the instrument cluster and the Head-up display.
The system may also show speed limits that apply to routes that are not signposted if the navigation system has current map data. For information on the current map version and map updates, see Map update in the Nav-igation system chapter.

Additional information:

  • Owner’s Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication

Safety information

Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Sensors
The system is controlled by a camera behind the windshield.

Displaying Speed Limit Info

General information
The Speed Limit Info can be shown or hidden via iDrive in the instrument cluster. Depending on the national-market version, Speed Limit Info is continuously displayed in the instrument cluster.
Displaying Speed Limit Info

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Driving”
  6. “Speed Limit Assistance”
  7. “Speed limits”
  8. “Show current limit”

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Display

Speed Limit Info 

Icon Description

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (39)Current speed limit.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (2)Depending on the national-market version, it is possible to switch between the units of measurement.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (3)No data on current speed limit available.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (4)Speed Limit Info not available.

If the detected speed limit has been exceeded, the display will flash.

Settings

  1. “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5.  “Driving”
  6. “Speed Limit Assistance”
  7. Select the desired setting.

System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:

  • Camera

Functional limitations
The system function may be limited and may provide incorrect information in the following situations:

  • Traffic signs are fully or partially concealed by objects, stickers, or paint.
  • Traffic signs do not comply with the stand-ard.
  • In areas that are not included in the naviga-tion system map data.
  • If navigation system map data is invalid, outdated, or unavailable.
  • When roads deviate from the navigation, such as due to changes in road layout.
  • When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.
  • When passing buses or trucks with traffic signs applied to them.
  • In case of electronic traffic signs.
  • When traffic signs that are valid for a parallel road are detected.
  • In the presence of country-specific road signs or road layouts.

Manual Speed Limiter

Principle
The Manual Speed Limiter can be used to set a speed limit, for instance to prevent the vehi-cle from exceeding speed limits.

General information
The system can limit the speed, starting at 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be driven at any speed below the set speed limit.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function 

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (8)System on/off.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (15)Store current speed.
    Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-gested speed manually.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (16)Rocker switch: Changing the speed limit.

Operation

Turning on the speed limiter 

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (8)Press the button on the steering wheel.

The current speed is accepted as the speed limit.
If the system is turned on while the vehi-cle is stationary or driving at low speeds, 20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the corresponding speed.
When the speed limit is activated, Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and the vehicle may change to COMFORT drive mode.

Turning off the speed limiter 

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (8)Press the button on the steering wheel.

The system switches off automatically in the following situations, for example:

  • When the engine is switched off.
  • When Cruise Control is switched on.
  • When certain driving modes are activated via Driving Experience Control.
    The displays turn off.

Stopping the speed limiter
If the reverse gear is engaged or in Neutral, the system is interrupted when rolling backwards.

Changing the speed limit BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (17)

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed limit is set.

  • Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the resistance point, the speed limit in-creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
  • Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

If the set speed limit is reached or unintention-ally exceeded, such as when driving downhill, the vehicle is not actively braked.
When the speed limit is set during a trip to
a value below the current speed, the vehicle coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.
The current speed can also be stored by pressing a button:

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (15)Press the button on the steering wheel.

Exceeding the speed limit
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit, a warning is issued.
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally.
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.
When the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit, the limit is automatically reacti-vated.

Warning when the speed limit is exceeded

Visual warning  

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (8)If the speed limit is exceeded: the indicator light in the instrument clus-ter flashes while the vehicle speed is greater than the set speed limit.

Acoustic warning 

  • If the speed limit is exceeded unintention- ally, a signal sounds.
  • When the speed limit is reduced to below the vehicle speed while driving, the signal sounds after some time.
  • When the speed limit is intentionally ex-ceeded by stepping on the accelerator pedal all the way down, there is no signal.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Display in the speedometer
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the speedometer displays the status of the sys-tem.

  • Green marking: system is ac-tive.
  • Gray marking: system is in-terrupted.
  • No marking: system is switched off. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (10)

Indicator light 

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (8)The indicator light lights up: the sys-tem is switched on.
  • The indicator light flashes: the set speed limit has been exceeded.
  • Gray indicator light: the system has been interrupted.

Cruise Control without Distance Control

Principle
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad-justed using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the set speed. The sys-tem accelerates and brakes automatically as needed.

General information
The system can be activated starting at 20 mph/30 km/h.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise control settings may change under certain conditions. For instance, acceleration can change depending on the driving mode.

Safety information 

Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning
The use of the system can lead to an in-creased risk of accidents in the following sit-uations, for instance:

  • On winding roads.
  • With high traffic volume.
  •  On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet conditions, or on a loose road surface.
    There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only use the system if driving at constant speed is possible.

Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning
Individual functions may not work correctly when towing with Front Collision Warning en-abled or Cruise Control switched on. There is a risk of accident. Switch off Front Collision Warning and Cruise Control before towing.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (11) BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (12)Cruise control on/off.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (13)Continue cruise control with the last setting.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (14)Interrupt cruise control.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (15)Store current speed.
    Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-gested speed manually.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (16)Rocker switch: Set speed.

Turning Cruise Control on/off Turning on the system 

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (11) BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (12)Depending on the equipment version, press the relevant button on the steer-ing wheel.

The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light up and the mark on the speedometer is set to the current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is maintained and stored as set speed.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on.

Turning off the system

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (11) BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (12)Depending on the equipment version, press the relevant button on the steer-ing wheel.

The displays turn off. The stored set speed is deleted.

Interrupting Cruise Control
Stopping the system manually

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (14)When active, press the button.

Stopping the system automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations, for example:

  • When braking manually.
  • Selector lever position D is disengaged.
  •  While Dynamic Traction Control is enabled or Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
  • While Dynamic Stability Control is adjusting.

Adjusting the speed

Maintaining and storing the speed BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (17)

Press the rocker switch up or down once while the system is interrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the set speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-ometer.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a button.

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (15)Press the button.

Changing the speedBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (17)

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

  • Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the resistance point, the set speed increases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
  • Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. The maximum speed that can be set de-pends on the vehicle.
  • Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance point and holding it: vehicle accelerates or decelerates without pressure on the accel-erator pedal.
    After the rocker switch is released, the vehi-cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Continuing cruise control
An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large be-fore calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unintentional deceleration or acceleration may occur.

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (13)Press the button with the system inter-rupted.

Cruise control is continued with the stored val-ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again:

  • When the system is switched off.
  • When drive-ready state is switched off.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Display in the speedometer
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the speedometer displays the status of the sys-tem.

  • Green marking: system is ac-tive, the marking indicates the desired speed.
  • Gray marking: system is in-terrupted, the marking indi-cates the stored speed.
  • No marking: system is switched off. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (10)

Indicator light 

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (20)Indicator light green: system is ac-tive.
  • Gray indicator light: the system has been interrupted.
  • No indicator light: system is switched off.

Displays in the Head-up display
Some system information can also be dis-played in the Head-up display.

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (21)The icon is displayed when the set speed is reached.

System limits
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if the drive power is insufficient.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may exceed or drop below the set desired speed in some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill grades.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Active Cruise Control with Distance Control

Principle
Using the Cruise Control, a desired speed and a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel.

General information
The system maintains the set speed on clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto-matically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the sys-tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is main-tained. The speed is adjusted as far as the given situation allows.
The distance can be adjusted at several levels. For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-tive speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a stand-still and then drives off again within a brief pe-riod, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits. Otherwise, drive off on your own, such as by pressing the accelerator pedal or the rocker switch on the steering wheel.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise control settings may change under certain conditions. For instance, acceleration can change depending on the driving mode.

Safety information

Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling away.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

  • Set the parking brake.
  • On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
  •  On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning
Risk of accident is greater when there is a high speed differential to other vehicles, for instance in the following situations:

  • When approaching a slowly moving ve-hicle at speed.
  • Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
  • When approaching stationary vehicles at speed.
    There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning
Individual functions may not work correctly when towing with Front Collision Warning en-abled or Cruise Control switched on. There is a risk of accident. Switch off Front Collision Warning and Cruise Control before towing.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (12)Cruise control on/off.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (15)Store current speed.
    Speed Limit Assistant: accept suggested speed manually.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (13)Continue cruise control with the last setting.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (14)Interrupt cruise control.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (22)Increase the distance.
    Switch Distance Control on/off.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (23)Reduce distance.
    Switch Distance Control on/off.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (16)Rocker switch:
    Set speed.

Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-sors:

  • Cameras behind the windshield.
  • Front radar sensor.
    Additional information:
    Sensors of the vehicle

Application range
The system is best used on well-maintained roads.
The minimum speed that can be set is 20 mph/30 km/h.

The maximum speed that can be set is limited and depends, for example, on the vehicle and the vehicle equipment.
The system can also be activated when sta-tionary.

Turning Cruise Control on/off or stopping it

Turning on the system 

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (12)Press the button on the steering wheel.

The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light up and the mark on the speedometer is set to the current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is maintained and stored as set speed.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on.

Turning off the system
To switch off the system while stationary, step on brake pedal at the same time.

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (12)Press the button on the steering wheel.

The displays turn off. The stored set speed is deleted.

Stopping the system manually

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (14)When enabled, press the button on the steering wheel.

If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time.

Stopping the system automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:

  •  The driver applies the brakes.
  • Selector lever position D is disengaged.
  • While Dynamic Traction Control is enabled or Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
  • While Dynamic Stability Control is adjusting.
  •  When the vehicle is stationary, the seat belt is unbuckled and the driver’s door is opened.
  • The system has not detected objects for an extended period, for instance on a road with very little traffic without curb or shoulder markings.
  • The detection range of the radar is im-paired, for instance by contamination or heavy precipitation.
  • After a longer stationary period when the vehicle has been braked to a stop by the system.

Adjusting the speed

Maintaining and storing the speed BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (9)

  • Press the rocker switch up or down once while the system is interrupted. The system will be activated.
  • The current speed is maintained and stored as desired speed.
  • The stored speed is displayed on the speed-ometer.
  • If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on.
  • The speed can also be stored by pressing a button.

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (15)Press the button.

Changing the speed BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (26)

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

  • Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the resistance point, the set speed increases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
  • Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
    Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action.

Adjusting the distance

Safety information 

Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system limits, deceleration can be late. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the surrounding traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance to the traffic and weather conditions and main-tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly by braking.

Reducing the distance

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (23)Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-tance.

Increasing the distance 

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (22)Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-tance.

Continuing cruise control
An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large be-fore calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unintentional deceleration or acceleration may occur.

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (13)Press the button on the steering wheel with the system interrupted.

Cruise control is continued with the stored val-ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again:

  • When the system is switched off.
  •  When drive-ready state is switched off.

Changing between Cruise Control with/without Distance Control

Safety information

Warning
The system does not react to traffic driv-ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions and brake as needed.

Changing over the Cruise Control mode
Switching Cruise Control without Distance Control off and on:

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (22)Press and hold this button.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (23)Press and hold this button. Switching on distance control:
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (22)Press the button.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (22)Press the button.

After changing, a Check Control message is displayed.

Displays in the instrument cluster

General information
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-plays in the instrument cluster may vary.

Display in the speedometer
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the speedometer displays the status of the sys-tem.

  • Green marking: system is ac-tive, the marking indicates the desired speed.
  •  Gray marking: system is in-terrupted, the marking indi-cates the stored speed.
  • No marking: system is switched off.

Indicator/warning lights
Depending on vehicle equipment:

Icon Description 

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (28)Vehicle icon white:
    No distance control display, as the accelerator pedal is being pressed.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (29)Green icon:
    A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.
    The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle in front is detected.
    Vehicle icon flashes green:
    Vehicle in front drove off.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (30)Gray icon: System interrupted.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (30)Icon flashes gray:
    The conditions are not adequate for the system to work.
    The system was deactivated but ap-plies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (31)Vehicle icon flashes red and a signal sounds:
    Brake and make an evasive maneu-ver, if necessary.

Displays in the Head-up display

Set speed
Some system information can also be dis-played in the Head-up display.

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (21)The icon is displayed when the set speed is reached.

Distance information

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (32)The icon is displayed when the dis-tance from the vehicle traveling ahead is too short.

The distance information is active in the fol-lowing situations: 

  • Active Cruise Control with Distance Control switched off.
  • Display in the Head-up display selected. Head-Up Display
  • Distance too short.
  • Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h.

System limits

System limits of the sensors
Additional information:

  • Cameras
  • Radar sensors

Detection rangeBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (33)

The detection capability of the system and the automatic braking performance are limited.
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be detected.

Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the follow-ing situations:

  • For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving road users.
  • Depending on the vehicle equipment and national availability, for red traffic lights.
  • For cross traffic.
  • For oncoming traffic.

Merging vehiclesBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (34)

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly merges into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis-tance. It may not be possible to restore the se-lected distance in certain situations, including if you are driving significantly faster than vehi-cles driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.

Cornering BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (35)

When the set speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.
The system has a limited detection range. Sit-uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi-cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be detected very late. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (36)

When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due
to the bend of the curve. If the system decel-erates you may compensate for it by briefly accelerating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the system is reactivated and controls speed independently.

Driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off automatically; for example:

  • On steep uphill grades.
  •  In front of bumps in the road.
    In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.

Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un-favorable weather or light conditions:

  • Poorer vehicle detection.
  • Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already recognized.

Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-vene actively, for instance by braking, steering or evading.

Drive power
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if the drive power is insufficient.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may exceed or drop below the set desired speed in some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill grades.

Speed Limit Assistant

Principle
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the speed limit. A suggested speed can be ap-plied.

General information
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit, this new speed value can be applied for the following systems:

  • Manual Speed Limiter.
  • Cruise control.
  • Active Cruise Control with Distance Control.

The speed value is suggested as the new de-sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed value, the corresponding system must be acti-vated.

Safety information 

Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel 
Button Function

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (6)Accept suggested speed manually.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (7)Rocker switch:
    Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Turning Speed Limit Assistant on/off

  1. “MENU”
  2. “Vehicle apps”
  3. “Driving settings”
  4. “Driver Assistance”
  5. “Driving”
  6. “Speed Limit Assistance”
  7. “Speed limits”
  8. Select the desired setting:
    • “Adjust manually”: detected speed limits can be applied manually.
    • “Show anticipation”: Depending on the national-market version: current and up-coming speed limits are displayed in the instrument cluster without being ap-plied.
    •  “Show current limit”: current speed lim-its are displayed without being applied in the instrument cluster.
    • “Off”: depending on the national-market version, Speed Limit Info and Speed Limit Assistant will be turned off.

Displays in the instrument cluster
A message is displayed in the instrument clus-ter when the system and a driver assistance system are activated.

Icon Function 

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (38)Depending on the equipment version, the indicator light illuminates green, together with the icon for a speed control system:
    Speed Limit Assistant is active and detected speed limits can be applied manually for the displayed system.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (39)Detected change of a speed limit with immediate effect.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (2)Depending on the national-market version, it is possible to switch be-tween the units of measurement.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (40)Indicator light illuminates green: the detected speed limit can be applied with the SET button.
    After it has been applied, a green checkmark is displayed.

Manual adoption

A detected speed limit can be applied man-ually for the active driver assistance system.

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driver-assistance-systems- (40)When the SET icon lights up, press the button.

Speed adjustment

Principle
It can be adjusted whether the speed limit is applied exactly or with a tolerance.

General information
You can configure a speed adaptation for all speed limits and an additional speed adapta-tion for speed limits up to 40 mph/60 km/h.
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or deactivated.

Setting the speed adjustment 

  1. MENU”
  2. Vehicle apps”
  3. Driving settings”
  4. Driver Assistance”
  5. Driving”
  6. Speed Limit Assistance”
  7. Select the desired setting:
    • Adjust speed limits”: set tolerance for the speed adaptation that affects all speeds.
    • 2nd adjustm. up to”: activate or deactivate additional speed adaptation.
    • Adjust speed limits”: With additional speed adjustment activated, set the tolerance for speed limits up to 40 mph/60 km/h.

System limits
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed Limit Info system.
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info. Additional information:

  • System limits of Speed Limit Information
  • System limits of the sensors

FAQ

What is the BMW Active Driving Assistant?

It’s a suite of driver assistance features designed to enhance safety and comfort, which may include features like collision warning, automatic braking, and lane departure warning.

Does the 2 Series Coupe have Adaptive Cruise Control?

Yes, the Coupe often features an adaptive cruise control system that can adjust speed based on the traffic ahead.

How does the Lane Departure Warning work?

It uses cameras to monitor road markings and alerts the driver if the vehicle begins to drift out of its lane without a turn signal activated.

Is there a blind spot detection system?

Yes, the vehicle usually comes equipped with a Blind Spot Detection system that alerts the driver if a vehicle is in their blind spot.

How does the Frontal Collision Warning function?

It utilizes sensors to detect potential frontal collisions and warns the driver, possibly initiating emergency braking if needed.

Is there a system for parking assistance?

Yes, the Parking Assistant feature helps drivers locate suitable parking spaces and assists in parking maneuvers.

Does the 2 Series Coupe offer a rear-view camera?

Absolutely. The rear-view camera provides drivers with a clear view of the area behind the vehicle when reversing.

What is the Cross-Traffic Alert function?

This system warns drivers of approaching traffic when backing out of a parking space or driveway.

How does the Active Lane Keeping Assistant differ from the Lane Departure Warning?

While Lane Departure Warning alerts the driver of unintentional lane departures, Active Lane Keeping Assistant can actively intervene to keep the car in its lane.

Is there a system to help with night driving?

Some models may feature a Night Vision system, which uses infrared to detect pedestrians or animals in low light conditions.

Does the car have a head-up display (HUD)?

Yes, the optional HUD projects essential driving information onto the windshield, allowing drivers to keep their eyes on the road.

How does the Traffic Jam Assistant benefit drivers?

It assists with acceleration, braking, and steering in heavy traffic at low speeds, reducing driver fatigue.

What is the purpose of the Speed Limit Info system?

It uses cameras to read road signs and display the current speed limit on the instrument cluster or head-up display.

Does the 2 Series Coupe feature any pedestrian safety systems?

Yes, the Pedestrian Warning with City Braking function detects pedestrians and can automatically apply the brakes to prevent or mitigate a collision.

Can the driver assistance features be customized or turned off?

Many of the systems can be adjusted or deactivated through the vehicle’s infotainment settings, depending on driver preference.

Useful Link

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 User Manual
https://www.bmwusa.com/owners-manuals.html
2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

2023 BMW 2 SERIES COUPE Driving stability control systems

BMW-Logo

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Driving stability control systems

BMW-2-Series-2023

With its cutting-edge driving stability control systems, the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe is both fun and safe to drive. This system is a great example of how hard BMW has worked to combine exciting driving qualities with the highest level of safety. Dynamic Traction Control (DTC) and Cornering Brake Control (CBC) are just two of the technologies that work together to make sure the car stays on the road no matter what. The Coupe’s stability systems act quickly and precisely, giving drivers a safety cushion and the confidence to explore the car’s performance. This dynamic interaction of high-tech sensors, complex algorithms, and real-time actions shows how good BMW is at balancing excitement and safety. It also makes the 2023 2 Series Coupe a great example of excellence in modern cars.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.

Additional information:
Vehicle equipment

Antilock Braking System

Principle
The Antilock Braking System prevents the locking of the wheels during braking.
The vehicle maintains its steerability even during emergency braking, which increases the active driving safety.
The Antilock Braking System is ready after each time drive readiness is turned on.

Brake assistant
The brake assistant applies maximum brak-ing assistance when the brake is depressed quickly. It reduces the braking distance to a minimum during emergency braking. The ad-vantages of the Antilock Braking System are thereby utilized.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of emergency braking.

Adaptive brake assistant
In combination with Cruise Control with Dis-tance Control, this system ensures that the brakes respond even more rapidly with brake actuation in critical situations.

Drive-off assistant

Principle
The drive-off assistant supports driving off on uphill grades.

Driving off 

  1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
  2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle may roll back slightly.

Dynamic Stability Control

Principle
Dynamic Stability Control helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing drive power and by brake interventions on individual wheels.

General information
The system detects the following unstable driving conditions, for instance:

  • Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.
  • Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which can lead to understeering.

Safety information

Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning
When driving with a roof load, for instance with a roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle’s center of gravity is higher, which increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situations. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Drive with roof load only with activated Dynamic Stability Control.

Overview

Button in the vehicle 

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-stability-control-systems- (1)

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-stability-control-systems- (2)DSC OFF

Activating/deactivating Dynamic Stability Control

General information
When Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, driving stability is reduced while accelerating and when cornering.
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic Stability Control as soon as possible.

Activating/deactivating the system

  1. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-stability-control-systems- (2)Press the button to open the selec-tion.
  2. “DSC OFF”
    DSC OFF is displayed on the instrument cluster and the Dynamic Stability Control indicator light illuminates.
  3. PressBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-stability-control-systems- (2) the button again to reactivate Dynamic Stability Control.
    DSC OFF is no longer displayed on the in-strument cluster and the Dynamic Stability Control indicator light goes out.

Display

In the instrument cluster
DSC OFF: Displayed on the instrument cluster when Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.

Indicator/warning lights

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-stability-control-systems- (3)Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-stability-control-systems- (4)Indicator light pulsates: Dynamic Sta-bility Control controls the drive and brake forces. The vehicle is stabilized.
Reduce speed and modify your driving style to the driving circumstances.
BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-stability-control-systems- (4)Indicator light is illuminated: Dynamic Stability Control has malfunctioned or is initializing. No driving stabilization.

Have the system immediately checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Automatic program change
Dynamic Stability Control can be activated automatically by Front Collision Mitigation de-pending on the situation.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Dynamic Traction Control

Principle
The Dynamic Traction Control is a variant of the Dynamic Stability Control where the drive power is optimized.
The system ensures maximum drive power on unusual road conditions, for instance unp-lowed snow covered roads or loose road surfa-ces, but with somewhat limited driving stability.

General information

  • When the Dynamic Traction Control is acti-vated, there is maximum traction. Driving sta-bility is limited during acceleration and when cornering.
    A brief activation of the Dynamic Traction Con-trol may be useful in the following situations:▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads.
  • When driving off from deep snow or loose ground.
  • When driving with tire chains.

Overview

Button in the vehicleBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-stability-control-systems- (5)

  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-stability-control-systems- (2)DSC OFF

Activating/deactivating the Dynamic Traction Control

  1. BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-stability-control-systems- (2)Press the button to open the selec-tion.
  2.  “Traction”
    TRACTION is displayed on the instrument cluster and the Dynamic Stability Control indicator light illuminates.
  3. 3. PressBMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-stability-control-systems- (2) the button again to reactivate Dynamic Stability Control.
    TRACTION is no longer displayed on the instrument cluster and the Dynamic Stabil-ity Control indicator light goes out.

Display

In the instrument cluster
TRACTION: Displayed on the instrument clus-ter when Dynamic Traction Control is enabled.

Indicator/warning lights

BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-stability-control-systems- (3)The indicator light illuminates: the Dy-namic Traction Control is activated.

Automatic program change
In certain situations, Dynamic Stability Control is activated automatically:

  • Active Cruise Control with Distance Control is activated.
  •  In case of a brake intervention by Front Collision Mitigation.
  • If the suspension control system fails.
  •  The vehicle has a flat tire.

xDrive

Principle
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the vehicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and other suspension control systems, such as Dynamic Stability Control, further optimizes traction and driving dynamics.
General information
xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to the front and rear axles as required by the driving situation and road conditions.
Because of the needs-based use of the all-wheel-drive system, Efficient4x4 yields a reduction in consumption.

M sport differential

The active M differential provides for continuously variable locking of the rear axle differential depending on the driving situation. This prevents spinning of a single rear wheel and thereby provides optimal traction in any driving situation.
The driver is responsible adapting his or her driving style to the situation.

Variable sport steering
The variable sport steering facilitates direct and agile handling with little steering effort. The variable sports steering works independently of the current speed, varying the steering ratio in line with the steering angle.

FAQ

What is the primary function of the stability control system in the BMW 2 Series Coupe?

Its primary role is to detect and reduce loss of traction, enhancing vehicle stability especially during adverse driving conditions.

How does Dynamic Traction Control (DTC) differ from Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)?

DTC allows more wheel spin than DSC, providing more dynamic driving but with reduced stability interventions.

Can I deactivate the stability control system?

Yes, drivers typically have the option to deactivate it, but it’s advised to use this feature judiciously, keeping safety in mind.

How does the system help during slippery road conditions?

By modulating engine power and applying brake force to specific wheels, it ensures optimum grip and stability.

Is there a dedicated system to assist with hill starts?

Yes, the Hill Start Assistant prevents the vehicle from rolling back when starting on an incline.

What are the indicators when the system is actively intervening?

Typically, a light flashes on the dashboard when the system is actively making corrections.

How does Cornering Brake Control (CBC) enhance stability?

CBC ensures balanced braking when cornering, preventing over or understeering.

Do I need to maintain the stability control system?

While the system is largely maintenance-free, it’s essential to ensure brakes, sensors, and tires are in good condition for optimum performance.

How does the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) integrate with the stability control?

ABS prevents wheel lock-up during hard braking, and its data is used by the stability control system to ensure vehicle stability.

Does the car have a system to manage performance during aggressive driving?

Yes, Performance Control can distribute power variably between the rear wheels for improved agility and cornering.

Will the system intervene if I’m driving too fast for conditions?

While it aids in maintaining stability, drivers should always adjust their speed based on road conditions.

What is Electronic Differential Lock Control (EDLC)?

EDLC improves traction by applying brakes to the spinning wheel, thereby redirecting power to the wheel with grip.

How does the Brake Assist system enhance the driving stability control systems?

It detects emergency braking scenarios and maximizes brake pressure to reduce stopping distances.

Can the system’s sensitivity be adjusted?

While the default settings are optimized for general conditions, some BMW models allow for adjustments via driving mode selections.

Is there a feature to stabilize the car during strong crosswinds?

Some advanced stability systems can detect and compensate for strong crosswinds, but it’s crucial to check the specific features of the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe.

Useful Link

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 User Manual
https://www.bmwusa.com/owners-manuals.html
2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

2023 BMW 2 SERIES COUPE Displays Instructions

BMW-Logo

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Displays Instructions 

BMW-2-Series-2023

Vehicle features and options

The displays in the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe are a beautiful example of how sporty design and cutting-edge technology come together in this car. At the heart of its tech-focused interior is a set of high-tech displays that not only fit with BMW’s history of designing layouts with the driver in mind but also show off the car’s futuristic spirit. These screens are like a digital canvas that clearly shows important vehicle data, location information, entertainment options, and advanced driver-assist alerts. The smooth merging of touch, voice, and gesture controls changes the way we think about interaction and makes it easy for a modern driver to use. The displays in the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe are more than just a way to get information. They are the heart of the driving experience and show how the car combines luxury, innovation, and speed.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Instrument cluster

Principle
The instrument cluster comprises various digi-tal displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range, temperatures as well as indicator and warning lights.

General information
The layout of the instrument cluster adapts to the respective driving mode. The positions of some displays may vary, e.g., the selector lever display. Some of the displays in the instrument cluster may differ from the illustrations in the Owner’s Manual.

Safety information

Warning
If the displays on the instrument cluster fail, do not use the vehicle. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe man-ner. If drive readiness is switched off and on again, the malfunction may be rectified and it may be possible to continue driving. If the malfunction cannot be remedied, have the system checked by an authorized service center or by another qualified service center or a repair shop.

Overview

Instrument cluster

Display ranges on the instrument cluster

  1.  Speedometer
  2.  Driver assistance systems 
  3.  Driver Attention Camera
  4.  Check Control 
    • Selector lever display
    • Gear shift indicator
    • election lists
      Using ECO PRO efficiently
  5.  Power gauge 
    • Tachometer 136 Engine temperature
  6.  Outside temperature
  7.  Central display range
  8.  Drive mode
  9.  Speed Limit Info 
    Speed Limit Assistant 
  10.  Time 
  11.  Fuel gauge 
    range

Additional information:

Indicator/warning lights
Operating elements on the steering wheel

Operating Function element

  • Display the menu bar on the instrument cluster.
  • BMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Displays-fig-4Press the corresponding arrow key to move the selection.
  • Turn knurled wheel: scroll se-lection up or down. Press knurled wheel: confirm selection.

Configuring the layout
In COMFORT drive mode, the layout in the instrument cluster can be individually configured and displayed.

  1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
    A menu bar is displayed in the instrument cluster.
  2.  “LAYOUT” Select the menu using the arrow buttons on the steering wheel where applicable.
  3.  Select the desired setting using the thumb- wheel on the steering wheel.

Settings

Specific displays can be configured individually, e.g., a second actual speed.

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Displays”
  4.  “Instrument cluster”
  5.  Select the desired setting.

Live Vehicle

Principle
Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your own vehicle with different information, e.g., vehicle status or energy flow indicators.

General information
Appropriate information is shown on the Control Display depending on the driving situation. Fault statuses are not taken into account.

Adaptive content
The following content is displayed in alternating order and, if necessary, depending on the selected drive mode:

  •  Vehicle status
  •  Current driving condition
  •  Sport displays
  •  Driving style analysis
  •  Trip data

Static information
The following information may be shown permanently on the control display regardless of the driving situation and driving mode set.

  •  Vehicle status.
  •  Trip data.

Adjusting the display
In the Live Vehicle menu, you can choose be-tween an adaptive display with changing con-tent and static content.

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Live Vehicle”
  4.  “Content”
  5.  Select the desired setting:
    •  “Adaptive content”: different content is displayed in varying order.
    •  “Trip data”: Trip data is permanently displayed.
    •  “Vehicle status”: Vehicle status is permanently displayed.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

BMW Head-up Display

Principle
The Head-up display projects important information in the driver’s field of view, for instance the speed.

General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the height of the Head-up display can be stored using the memory function. Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up display in the Vehicle Care chapter.

Overview

The protective glass of the Head-up display is located between the steering wheel and the windshield.

Configuring a view
The views for the Head-up Display can be set independently of the display on the instrument cluster, e.g., a reduced view.

  1.  Press the button on the steering wheel. A menu bar is displayed in the instrument cluster.
  2.  “HEAD-UP” Select the menu using the arrow buttons on the steering wheel where applicable.
  3.  Select the desired setting using the thumb-wheel on the steering wheel.

Display
Turning the Head-up display on/off

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Displays”
  4.  “Head-up display”
  5.  “Head-up display”

Overview
The following information is displayed on the Head-up display:

  •  Vehicle speed.
  •  Navigation instructions.
  •  Check Control messages.
  •  Sport displays.
  •  Lists and messages.
  •  Driver assistance systems.

Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed.

Visibility of the display
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up display is influenced by the following factors:

  •  Seat position.
  •  Objects on the protective glass of the Head-up display.
  •  Dust or dirt on the protective glass of the Head-up display.
  • Windshield dirty on inside or outside.
  •  Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
  •  Wet road.
  • Unfavorable light conditions.

If the image is distorted, have the base set-tings checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Settings
Individual settings can be entered for the Head-up display, such as for the height, bright-ness or illustration. In addition, individual dis-plays in the Head-up display can be set up separately such as for Driver Assistance.

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Displays”
  4.  “Head-up display”
  5.  Select the desired setting.

Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system. The shape and coating of the special wind-shield enable the system to function.In the event of damage, have the special wind-shield replaced by an authorized service center or by another qualified service center or a re-pair shop.

Indicator/warning lights

Principle
Indicator and warning lights in the instrument cluster display the status of some functions in the vehicle. Indicator and warning lights indi-cate malfunctions in monitored systems.

General information
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready state is turned on.

Red lights
Seat belt reminder

  • Seat belt on the driver’s seat is not buckled. Additional information:
  • Seat belt reminder

Additional information: Seat belt reminder

Airbag system

  • Indicator light comes on briefly: indi-cates that the entire airbag system and seat belt tensioners are operational when drive readiness is switched on. Indicator light illuminates continuously: there is a malfunction. Have the vehicle checked immediately by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
    Additional information: Airbags

Parking brake

  • The parking brake is set. Additional information: Parking brake

Brake system

Malfunction in the brake system, braking assistance may be faulty. Continue to drive moderately. Avoid abrupt braking, take longer braking distance into account.

Have the vehicle checked immediately by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Risk of collision

Indicator light illuminates or flashes in conjunction with an acoustic signal if a collision is imminent . Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation

Pedestrian Warning

Indicator light illuminates: risk of collision with a person has been detected. Increased awareness is required. Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal sounds: collision with a person is imminent. In-tervene immediately yourself according to the situation.
Additional information: Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Mitigation

Forward Collision Warning

Indicator light illuminates: risk of col-lision, e.g., with a vehicle. Increased awareness is required. Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal sounds: collision with a vehicle is imminent. In-tervene immediately yourself according to the situation.
Additional information: Forward Collision Warning with light braking function

Active Cruise Control with Distance Control

Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal sounds: braking and evading.
Additional information: Active Cruise Control with Distance Control

Yellow lights
Antilock Braking System

System malfunction. Steerability is limited during emergency braking.
Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer braking distance into account. Have the system immediately checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Forward Collision Mitigation is limited or has malfunctioned

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version: function restriction detected, e.g., due to low sun or because the system has failed. You may or because the system has failed. You may continue driving. If necessary, follow the instructions from Check Control messages. Additional information: Forward Collision Mitigation

Front Collision Warning switched off

Depending on the equipment and national-market version: the system is turned off. Additional information: Forward Collision Mitigation

Dynamic Stability Control is adjusting, restricted, or has failed

Indicator light pulsates: Dynamic Stability Control controls the drive and brake forces. The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify your driving style to the driving circumstances. Indicator light is illuminated: Dynamic Stability Control has malfunctioned or is initializing. No driving stabilization. Have the system immediately checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Additional information: Dynamic Stability Control

The Dynamic Stability Control deactivated or the Dynamic Traction Control activated

The Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or the Dynamic Traction Control is activated. Additional information:

  •  Dynamic Stability Control
  •  Dynamic Traction Control

Flat tire monitor

The flat tire monitor reports tire pressure loss in a tire. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Additional information: Flat tire monitor

Tire pressure monitor

The indicator light illuminates: the Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low tire pressure or a flat tire. Follow the information in the Check Control message. The indicator light flashes and is then illuminated continuously: flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot be detected.

  •  Fault caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.
  •  In the case of tires with special approval: the tire pressure monitor was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again.
  •  Wheel without wheel electronics installed: have it checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.
  •  Malfunction: have the system checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Additional information: Tire pressure monitor

Steering system

Steering system may be faulty. Have the system checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Emissions

The warning light lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

  • The warning light flashes under certain circumstances:
  • This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.
  • Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Additional information:
Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics

Green lights
Turn signal

Turn signal is on. Unusually rapid blinking of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Additional information: Turn signal

Parking lights

  • Parking lights are switched on. Additional information: Parking lights low beams
      •  

Automatic High Beam Assistant

Low beams are switched on and the Automatic High Beam Assistant is activated. High beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the traffic situation.
Additional information: Automatic High Beam Assistant

Lane departure warning

The indicator light lights up: the system is switched on. A lane boundary has been detected on at least one side of the vehicle and the system is ready to intervene. Warnings will be issued.
Indicator light flashes: the system is performing a steering intervention.
Additional information: Lane departure warning

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Automatic Hold: vehicle is held automatically

Automatic Hold is ready to use. The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is stationary. Additional information:
Automatic Hold

Automatic Hold: vehicle secured against rolling away

The vehicle is automatically secured against rolling away after stopping. Additional information: Automatic Hold

Manual Speed Limiter

The indicator light lights up: the system is switched on. The indicator light flashes: the set speed limit has been exceeded. Additional information:
Manual Speed Limiter

Cruise Control

The system is active. Additional information: Cruise control

Active Cruise Control with Distance Control

Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has been detected ahead of you. The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle in front is detected.
Indicator lamp is blinking: vehicle ahead is driving off.
Additional information: Active Cruise Control with Distance Control

Speed Limit Assistant

Depending on vehicle equipment, the indicator light illuminates green, together with the icon for a cruise control system. Speed Limit Assistant is active and detected speed limits can be applied manually for the displayed system.
Additional information: Speed Limit Assistant

Speed Limit Assistant

The detected speed limit can be ap-plied with the SET button. As soon as the speed limit has been applied, a green checkmark is displayed.
Additional information: Speed Limit Assistant

Blue lights

High beams

  • High beams have been switched on. Additional information: High beams
  • Automatic High Beam Assistant

Gray lights Seat belt reminder

Seat belt on the passenger seat or an-other seat in the vehicle is not buckled. Additional information: Seat belts

Manual Speed Limiter

Indicator light is illuminated: the system is interrupted. Additional information: Manual Speed Limiter

Cruise Control

The system is interrupted. Additional information: Cruise control

Active Cruise Control with Distance Control

Indicator light is illuminated: the system is interrupted. Indicator light flashes: the conditions are not adequate for the system to work. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Additional information: Active Cruise Control with Distance Control

White lights
Cruise Control with Distance Control

No Distance Control displayed since the accelerator pedal is being pressed.
Additional information: Active Cruise Control with Distance Control

Check Control

Principle
The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the monitored systems.

General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster and, if applicable, in the Head-up display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a text message may appear on the Control Display.

Hiding Check Control messages
An arrow icon next to the Check Control message indicates whether the Check Control message can be hidden.

To hide Check Control messages, press the left arrow button on the steering wheel.

Continuous display

Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the fault is eliminated. If several faults occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively. Permanently displayed Check Control messages can be hidden temporarily. These messages are automatically displayed again after approx. 8 seconds.

Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check Control messages are stored and can be displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check Control messages

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Vehicle status”
  4.  “Check Control”
  5.  Select the desired text message.

Display

Check Control

At least one Check Control message is displayed or stored.

Text messages
Text messages in combination with an icon in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con-trol message and the meaning of the indicator/warning lights.

Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as the cause of a fault or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. With urgent text messages, the added text will be automatically displayed on the control dis-play.
Depending on the Check Control message, fur-ther help can be selected.

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Vehicle status”
  4.  “Check Control”
  5.  Select the desired text message.
  6.  Select the desired setting.

Messages after trip completion
Certain messages displayed while driving are displayed again after drive-ready state is switched off.

Selection lists

Principle
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used for certain functions in the instrument cluster or the Head-up display.

  •  Entertainment source.
  •  Current audio source.
  •  List of most recent telephone calls.

If necessary, the corresponding menu will open on the Control Display.

Displaying and using the list
The selection lists can be displayed and operated using the operating elements on the steering wheel.

Control elements Function

  • Turn the knurled wheel: display the entertainment list or scroll up or down in the list. Press knurled wheel: confirm selection.
  • Press the corresponding arrow key to change the entertainment source.
  • Show list of most recent tele-phone calls.

Display

An example:
To change the track or entertainment source after bringing up the entertainment list, use the arrow buttons on the steering wheel. Press the thumbwheel to confirm the selection. Turn the thumbwheel up or down to select the desired entry in the list. Press the thumbwheel to confirm the selection. Depending on the equipment version, the list in the instrument cluster may differ from the illustration.

Gear shift indicator

Principle
The shift point indicator recommends the gear that best suits the current driving situation. Us-ing the optimal gear supports an efficient driv-ing style.

General information
The gear shift indicator is active in manual mode M depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version.

Displays
Information on upshifts or downshifts or the engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster. On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the engaged gear is displayed.

Example Description

  • In continuous manual mode M: Optimal gear is engaged.
  • With shift paddles: temporary manual mode.
  • With shift paddles: Sport program.
  • Shift information.

Additional information:
Shift paddles

Power gauge

Principle
The power gauge indicates the currently drawn drive power as a percentage.

Enabling/disabling the power gauge
The power display or tachometer is shown de-pending on the driving mode selected or the individual configuration of the layout.

Display

Needle in range of arrow 1: display for energy recovery such as while decelerating CHARGE. Needle in range of arrow 2: the drive power in percent, POWER.

Reduced drive power
The available power may be reduced due to certain factors. The power gauge is automatically adjusted accordingly. In addition, the icons on the power gauge and tachometer indicate reduced drive power.

Icon Description

  • Blue icon: cold drivetrain. White icon: increased drive system temperature, for instance due to sustained or high power demand when driving on mountain roads.
  • Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version: Drive power limitation defined via the BMW Digital Key.
  • System-related functional limitation. A Check Control message is displayed in addition where applicable.

Tachometer

General information
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect the engine.

Activating/deactivating the tachometer
The tachometer is displayed depending on the selected drive mode or the individually config-ured layout.

Reduced engine speed range
The available engine speed range may be reduced due certain factors such as a cold drive system. The tachometer display is automatically adjusted depending on the available en-gine speed range. In addition, icons in the tachometer indicate a reduced speed range.

Standby state and drive-ready state

  • The lettering OFF in the instrument cluster indicates that drive-ready state is switched off and standby state is switched on.
  • The READY message in the instrument cluster indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready to start the engine automatically.

Additional information:

  •  Operating condition of the vehicle
  •  Auto Start/Stop function

Engine temperature

Cold engine: the needle is in the blue temperature range, close to the stop of the temperature display, and the text WARM-UP is displayed. Drive at moderate RPM and vehicle speeds.

  •  Normal operating temperature: the needle is in the middle or in the left half of the temperature display.
  •  Hot engine: the needle is in the red temperature range. In addition, a Check Control message is displayed.

Additional information: Coolant level

Indicator light in the instrument cluster

A red indicator light is displayed.

Outside temperature

General information
If the indicator drops to +37℉/+3℃ or lower, a signal sounds. A Check Control message is displayed. There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Safety information

Warning
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on bridges or shady sections of the road. There is a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to the weather conditions at low temperatures.

Principle
Shift lights are temporarily displayed on the instrument cluster and indicate the appropriate time to upshift in order to achieve rapid acceleration.

General information
The shift lights are active in manual mode M and can be displayed on the instrument cluster or on the Head-up display in combination with the tachometer.

Functional requirements

  •  “SPORT”: The driving mode must be selected depending on vehicle equipment.
  •  To display the shift lights on the Head-up display, select Sport view.
  •  Manual mode M must be activated.
  •  Advanced mode must be activated. Additional information:
  • Advanced mode

Successive fields illuminating yellow indicate an upcoming shift point.

  • Shift when all fields illuminate red at the latest.
  • When the maximum RPM is reached, the entire display flashes red and the fuel sup-ply is interrupted in order to protect the engine.

2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Central display range

General information
The following settings can be selected:

  •  Reduced display.
  •  Trip data
  •  With navigation system: route preview.
  •  With navigation system: map view.
  •  G-meter
  •  Entertainment.

Some contents for the central display range can also be configured as a view in the Head-up display.
Additional information: Head-Up Display

Configuring the central display range 
The content of the central display range on the instrument cluster can be configured individually, for instance the trip data display.

  1.  Press the button on the steering wheel. A menu bar is displayed in the instrument cluster.
  2.  “CONTENT” Select the menu using the arrow buttons on the steering wheel where applicable.
  3.  Select the desired setting using the thumb-wheel on the steering wheel.

Trip data

Principle
The trip data display provides various information about the trip, e.g., average consumption or trip distance.

General information
The trip data can be displayed on the Control Display and in the instrument cluster. The values can be displayed and reset de-pending on different intervals.

Display on the control display
General information
The following trip data is shown on the control display:

  •  Configured interval for displaying trip data.
  •  Average fuel consumption depending on the configured interval.
  •  Travel time depending on the config-ured interval.
  •  Distance traveled depending on the configured interval.
  •  Distance traveled in Coasting mode.

Displaying trip data continuously

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Live Vehicle”
  4.  “Content”
  5.  “Trip data”

Display in the instrument cluster
Information on consumption and distance cov-ered can be displayed in the instrument clus-ter.

  •  Current consumption, arrow 1.
  •  Average consumption, arrow 2.
  •  Distance traveled depending on the config-ured interval, arrow 3.

Current consumption
The current fuel consumption display allows you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g., to drive economically and in an environmen-tally-friendly manner.

Average fuel consumption
The average consumption is displayed de-pending on how the intervals for displaying trip data are configured.

Adjusting the display of the trip data
The intervals for the display of the trip data in the instrument cluster and on the Control Display are adjustable.
Using the button on the left steering column switch:

  1. Press the button. The trip data is displayed.
  2.  Press button repeatedly until the desired setting is displayed. Via i Drive:
    1.  “MENU”
    2.  “Vehicle apps”
    3.  “System settings”
    4.  “Time period for trip data
  3.  “Values”
  4.  Select the desired setting:
    •  “Since start of trip ( )”: the values are automatically reset approx. four hours af-ter the vehicle has come to a standstill.
    •  “Since last refuel ( )”: the values are automatically reset after refueling with a larger quantity of fuel.
    •  “Since factory”: the values since the time of the factory delivery are dis-played.
    •  “Since Individual ( )”: the values since the last manual reset are displayed. The values can be reset at any time.

Resetting average values manually

The following interval can be reset manually at any time:
“Since Individual ( )”
Using the button on the left steering column switch:

  1. Press the button. The trip data is displayed.
  2. Press and hold the button until the values are reset.

Via iDrive:

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “System settings”
  4.  “Time period for trip data”
  5.  “Reset Individual”

The average values and counters are reset. Once the average values and counters have been reset, the following interval is automatically activated: “Since Individual ( )”

G-meter

General information
The G-meter indicates the forces that are ap-plied in longitudinal and transverse direction on the vehicle occupants while driving. The display can be configured on the central display range of the instrument cluster. The values are automatically reset whenever you start a new drive.

Additional information:
Central display area

Manually reseting g-meter values

  1.  Display the g-meter on the instrument cluster.
  2.  Press and hold the button on the left steering column until the values are reset.

Date and time

Various settings can be applied for the date and time display such as the date format. Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, the time zone can be set and automatic time setting can be activated. With automatic time setting, the time, date and, if necessary, the time zone are updated automatically.

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “System settings”
  4.  “Date and time”
  5.  Select the desired settings.

Fuel gauge

Principle
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-played.

General information
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary.
Additional information: Refueling

Display

An arrow beside the fuel pump icon shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. The current range is displayed as numerical value.

Indicator light in the instrument cluster

The yellow indicator light illuminates, once the fuel reserve is reached.

General information
The estimated range with remaining fuel is permanently displayed on the instrument cluster.With a low remaining range, a Check Control message is briefly displayed. A low remaining range means that engine functions cannot al-ways be ensured for sporty driving, e.g., when cornering at speed. The Check Control message appears continuously below a range of approx.30 miles/50 km.

Safety information

NOTICE
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Refuel promptly.The current range is displayed as a numerical value next to the fuel gauge.

Setting the units of measurement

Depending on the national-market version, you can set the units of measurement for some values, for instance consumption, distances, and temperature.

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “System settings”
  4.  “Units”
  5.  Select the desired setting.

Vehicle status

General information
The status can be displayed and actions per-formed for several systems, such as for Check Control. Depending on the setting, the vehicle status is displayed dynamically or continuously on the Control Display.

Displaying the vehicle status continuously

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Vehicle status”

Icon Description

  • “Flat Tire Monitor”: Status of the flat tire monitor
  • “Tire Pressure Monitor”: status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
  • “Engine oil level”: electronic oil measurement
  • “Check Control”: displaying stored Check Control messages
  • “Required services”: displaying service notifications

Current driving condition

General information
The current driving condition is displayed dynamically while driving in the Live Vehicle menu on the control display. The following states can be displayed:

  •  Driving.
  •  Coasting mode: “EFFICIENT COASTING”
  •  “CHARGING BATTERY” With mild hybrid technology:
  •  Adaptive recuperation.
  •  Efficient rolling with engine switched off. Additional information:
  •  Adaptive recuperation
  •  Coasting

Functional requirements

  •  COMFORT or ECO PRO drive mode must be selected.
  •  With Live Vehicle, the following setting must be selected: “Adaptive content”

An example:
The adaptive recuperation is active, arrow 1. The vehicle battery is charged when the vehi-cle decelerates, arrow 2.

Sport displays

Principle
The Sport displays especially support a sporty driving style.

Functional requirements

  • SPORT drive mode must be selected.
     
  •  With Live Vehicle, the following setting must be selected: “Adaptive content”

Display
The sport displays are displayed in the Live Vehicle menu on the control display. The following information is displayed:

  •  Torque.
  •  Power.
  •  Boost pressure.
  •  Engine oil temperature.

Service notifications

Principle
The function displays the service notifications and the corresponding maintenance scopes.

General information
After turning on the drive readiness, the next service appointment or the distance remaining until the next service is displayed briefly in the instrument cluster. A service advisor can read out the current service notifications from your vehicle key.

Display
More information on the type of service re-quired may be displayed on the Control Dis-play.

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Vehicle status”
  4.  “Required services” Maintenance work and legally mandated inspections are displayed.
  5.  Select a desired entry to call up detailed information.

Entering appointment dates
Dates for mandatory vehicle inspections can be entered. Make sure that the vehicle’s date and time are set correctly.

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Vehicle status”
  4. “Required services”
  5.  “Vehicle inspection”
  6.  “Date:”
  7.  Select the desired setting.

FAQ

Q: What types of displays are available in the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe?

A: The 2023 2 Series Coupe typically features a combination of digital instrument clusters and central infotainment displays.

Q: What is the digital instrument cluster in the 2 Series Coupe?

A: The digital instrument cluster is a customizable display that replaces traditional analog gauges with digital representations of speed, fuel, navigation, and more.

Q: How large is the central infotainment display in the 2 Series Coupe?

A: The size of the central infotainment display can vary, but it’s usually around 8 to 10 inches, providing ample visibility and touch functionality.

Q: Can you control the displays using touch in the 2 Series Coupe?

A: Yes, the central infotainment display is often touch-enabled, allowing you to interact with menus and functions directly.

Q: What functions can you access through the central display?

A: The central display typically offers access to navigation, audio controls, vehicle settings, connectivity options, and more.

Q: Are there physical controls for the displays in the 2 Series Coupe?

A: In addition to touch controls, the 2 Series Coupe often features physical buttons and knobs for common functions, ensuring ease of use while driving.

Q: Is the display configurable in terms of layout and information?

A: Yes, the digital instrument cluster and central display are often configurable, allowing you to customize the information and layout according to your preferences.

Q: Can you integrate your smartphone with the displays in the 2 Series Coupe?

A: Yes, the 2 Series Coupe typically offers smartphone integration through Apple CarPlay and Android Auto, allowing you to mirror apps on the central display.

Q: Does the display provide real-time traffic and navigation information?

A: Yes, the central display usually offers real-time traffic updates and turn-by-turn navigation instructions to help you reach your destination efficiently.

Q: Are there advanced driver assistance displays in the 2 Series Coupe?

A: The 2 Series Coupe often includes displays that provide information about active safety features, such as adaptive cruise control and lane-keeping assistance.

Q: Can you switch between different display modes in the 2 Series Coupe?

A: Yes, the digital instrument cluster often offers multiple display modes, including sport, comfort, and eco, which can adjust the visuals and information presented.

12. Q: Is there a head-up display available in the 2 Series Coupe?

A: Some versions of the 2 Series Coupe may offer an optional head-up display that projects important information onto the windshield.

Q: Can you control the audio system through the central display?

A: Yes, the central display typically provides controls for audio sources, volume adjustments, equalizer settings, and more.

14. Q: Are the displays easy to read in different lighting conditions?

A: The displays in the 2 Series Coupe are often designed to be easily readable in various lighting conditions, with brightness adjustments available.

Q: Can you view vehicle performance data on the displays?

A: The digital instrument cluster might provide vehicle performance data, including speed, RPM, and possibly additional performance metrics.

Useful Link

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 User Manual
https://www.bmwusa.com/owners-manuals.html
2023 BMW 2 Coupe Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Driving User Manual

BMW-Logo

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Driving

BMW-2-Series-2023

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equip-ment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.
Additional information: Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Start/Stop button

Principle
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches drive-ready state on or off.

General information
Drive-ready state is switched on when you de-press the brake pedal while pressing the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches the drive-ready state back off and standby state is switched back on.
Additional information:

Driving off

  1.  Turn on drive-ready state.
  2.  Apply gear position.
  3.  Release the parking brake.
  4.  Driving off.

Auto Start/Stop function

Principle
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on. The engine starts automatically for driving off.

General information
After each engine start using the Start/Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready. Without mild-hybrid technology: the function is activated below speeds of approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
With mild-hybrid technology: the function is activated below speeds of approx. 10 mph/15 km/h Depending on the selected driving mode, the system is automatically activated or deactivated.

Engine stop
Functional requirements
The engine is switched off automatically when stopping under the following conditions:

  •  The selector lever is in selector lever position D.
  •  Without mild hybrid technology: The brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is at a standstill or the vehicle is held by Automatic Hold.
  •  The driver’s seat belt is buckled or the driver’s door is closed.

Manual engine stop
If the engine was not switched off automatically when the vehicle stopped, the engine can be switched off manually:

  •  Depress the brake pedal forcefully again from the current pedal position.
  •  Engage selector lever position P.

When all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the engine switches off.

Air conditioning system when the engine is switched off
The air flow from the air conditioning system is reduced when the engine is switched off.

Display in the instrument cluster

BMW-2-Series-2023-1The display in the instrument cluster indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an automatic engine start.

Functional limitations

The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations:

  •  In case of a steep downhill grade.
  •  The brake pedal was not pressed hard enough.
  •  When the ambient temperature is high and automatic climate control is switched on.
  •  The vehicle interior has not yet been heated or cooled as desired.
  •  When window condensation is possible and automatic climate control is switched on.
  •  Engine or other parts are not at operating temperature.
  •  Engine cooling is required. The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned.
  •  Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
  •  At higher elevations.
  •  Hood is unlocked.
  •  The Automatic Parking Assistant is activated.
  •  For stop-and-go traffic.
  • Selector lever in position N, S, or R.
  •  After driving in reverse.
  •  Using fuel with high ethanol content.

Starting the engine
Functional requirements
The engine starts automatically under the following preconditions:

  •  By releasing the brake pedal.
  •  When Automatic Hold is activated: step on the accelerator pedal.

Driving off
Accelerating as usual after starting the engine.

Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met:

  •  The driver’s seat belt is unbuckled and the driver’s door is open.
  •  Hood was unlocked.

Some indicator lights light up for a varied length of time. The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button.

System limits
Even if driving off was not intended, the deac-tivated engine starts up automatically in the following situations:

  •  With excessive warming of the interior when cooling is turned on.
  •  With excessive cooling of the interior when heating is turned on.
  •  When window condensation is possible and automatic climate control is switched on.
  •  Without mild hybrid technology: In case of a steering operation.
  •  When changing selector lever position from D or P.
  •  In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat-tery.
  •  When starting an oil level measurement.

Deactivating the system manually
Principle
The engine is not automatically switched off. The engine is started during an automatic engine stop. Without mild hybrid technology: via buttonBMW-2-Series-2023-2

  •  Press the button. LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.
  • LED off: Auto Start/Stop function is ena-bled.

Without mild hybrid technology: via i Drive

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Driving settings”
  4.  “Drivetrain and chassis”
  5.  “Auto Start/Stop”
  6.  Select the desired setting.

Via selector lever position
The Auto Start/Stop function is also disabled in selector lever position S.

Via the Driving Dynamics Control
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated in SPORT driving mode of the Driving Dynamics Control.

Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop
If the engine stops automatically, the vehicle can be parked safely, for example to leave it.

  1.  Press the Start/Stop button.
  2. Drive-ready state is switched off.
  3.  Standby state is switched on.
  4.  Selector lever position P is engaged automatically.
  5.  Set the parking brake.

Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func-tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea-sons, for instance if no driver is detected.

Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. You may con-tinue driving. Have the system checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Steptronic  transmission

Principle
The Steptronic transmission is the vehicle’s automatic transmission. With shift paddles, it offers the option of manual shifting if needed.

Safety information

Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling away, e.g. by applying the parking brake.

Selector lever positions

Gear position D
Selector lever position for normal driving. All gears for forward travel are activated automatically.

R reverse
Engage selector lever position R only when the vehicle is stationary.

N neutral
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power, for instance in car washes, in selector lever position N.

Parking position P
General information
Selector lever position, for instance for parking the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive in selector lever position P. Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary.

P is engaged automatically
Selector lever position P is engaged automatically in situations such as the following:

  •  After drive readiness is switched off, if se-lector lever position R, D, or S is engaged.
  •  After standby is switched off, if selector lever position N is engaged.
  •  The driver’s seat belt is unbuckled and the driver’s door is opened, without pressing the brake pedal, while the vehicle is station-ary and selector lever position D, S, or R is engaged.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se-lector lever position P is engaged and the parking brake is engaged. Otherwise, the vehi-cle may begin to move.
Additional information: Parking brake, refer to page 120. Engaging selector lever positions

General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear position or reverse, main-tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to drive off.

Functional requirements
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to change from selector lever position P to an-other selector lever position. The selection lever position P cannot be changed until all technical prerequisites are met. Engaging selector lever position D, N, R The selector lever automatically returns to the center position when released.BMW-2-Series-2023-3

Engaging selector lever position PBMW-2-Series-2023-4

Press button P. The transmission lock is engaged.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to roll without its own power for a short distance, for instance in a car wash or to be pushed. Engaging selector lever position N

NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en-gaged when standby state is switched off. The wheels are blocked. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch off standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g., in a car wash.

  1.  Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on the brake pedal.
  2.  If necessary, release the parking brake and switch off Automatic Hold.
  3.  Depress the brake pedal.
  4.  Engage selector lever position N.
  5.  Switch off drive-ready state.
  6. In this way, standby state remains switched on, and a Check Control message is dis-played. Selector lever position P is engaged automatically after approximately 35 minutes. If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position. Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if needed. Additional information

Selector lever position P is engaged automatically after approximately 35 minutes. If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position. Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if needed.

Additional information:
Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock, refer to page 116.

Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re-sistance point at the full throttle position.

S Sport mode
Principle
The shifting points and shifting times in the Sport program are designed for sportier han-dling. The transmission, for instance shifts up later and the shifting times are shorter.

Activating the Sport programBMW-2-Series-2023-5

Pull the selector lever from selector lever position D to D/S. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance S1. The sport program of the transmission is activated. Ending the Sport program Pull the selector lever to D/S. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Displays in the instrument cluster

BMW-2-Series-2023-6The selector lever position is displayed, for example P.

Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock

General information
Unlock the transmission lock electronically, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a hazardous area in the event of a malfunction. Before unlocking the transmission lock, secure the vehicle against rolling away, for instance with a wheel chock.

Engaging selector lever position N

  1.  Quickly press the Start/Stop button three times without stepping on the brake.
  2.  Depress the brake pedal.
  3. Press the selector lever to position N.
  4. An appropriate Check Control message is displayed. Position N is indicated on the selector lever. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous area and secure it against rolling away.

Shift paddles

Principle
The shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to change gears manually.

General information
Shifting
The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and road speeds. Even in manual mode, the transmission shifts automatically in certain situations, e.g., when speed limits are reached.

Temporary manual mode
In selector lever position D, pulling a shift paddle switches into manual mode temporarily. The engaged gear is also displayed in the in-strument cluster, for instance D1.
After conservative driving in manual mode without acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode. It is possible to switch into automatic mode:

  •  Pull and hold the right shift paddle until D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
  •  In addition to the pulled right shift paddle, pull the left shift paddle.

Continuous manual mode
In Sport program S, pulling a shift paddle switches to manual mode M permanently. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance M1.It is possible to switch into automatic mode:

  •  Pull and hold the right shift paddle until S is displayed on the instrument cluster.
  •  In addition to the pulled right shift paddle, pull the left shift paddle.
  •  Pull the selector lever to D/S.

When M2 is set manually while the vehicle is stationary, the transmission will no longer shift back to M1. This shift behavior is maintained until M1 is engaged manually or manual mode M is exited.

ShiftingBMW-2-Series-2023-7

  •  Upshifting: pull the right shift paddle.
  •  Downshifting: pull left shift paddle.

The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Advanced mode
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Steptronic Sport transmission offers an advanced mode with adapted shift characteristics.

  •  Automatic downshift to lowest possible gear.
  • If the left shift paddle is pulled and held, the Steptronic transmission automatically shifts down to the lowest possible gear.
  •  Avoid automatic upshifting in manual mode.
  • In manual mode, the Steptronic  transmission does not shift up automatically when speed limits are reached.
  •  There is no downshifting for kickdown.

Enabling advanced mode
Advanced mode is active in manual mode.
“SPORT”: The driving mode must be selected and configured depending on vehicle equip-ment.

Launch Control

Principle
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration on roads with good traction under dry sur-rounding conditions.

General information
Using Launch Control causes premature com-ponent wear since this function represents a very heavy load for the vehicle.Do not turn the steering wheel when driving off with Launch Control.Do not use Launch Control when driving in the vehicle.
Additional information: Breaking-in period, refer to page 244.

Functional requirement

Launch Control can be used when the engine is at operating temperature. The engine is at operating temperature after an uninterrupted trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.

Driving off with Launch Control

  1. Turn on drive-ready state.
  2.  Press the button.
  3.  Activate TRACTION on the Control Display.
  4.  Engage selector lever position S.
  5.  With the left foot, press down forcefully on the brake.
  6.  Press and hold down the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position, kickdown. destination flag is displayed in the instru-ment cluster.
  7.  The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait briefly until the engine speed is constant. Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.
  8.  Release the brake within 3 seconds after the destination flag illuminates. The vehicle accelerates .Upshifting occurs automatically as long as the destination flag is displayed and the accelerator pedal is not released.

Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control has been used, the trans-mission must cool down for a short time before Launch Control can be used again. Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions when used again.

After using Launch Control
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic Stability Control as soon as possible.

System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF without Launch Control mode.

Steptronic  Sport
transmission: sprint function

Principle
Depending on the equipment, the Sprint func-tion can be used for an upcoming acceleration process. The Sprint function prepares the driv-etrain for the acceleration process.

General information
When the Sprint function is activated, the re-sponse characteristics of the vehicle will be-come more dynamic.

Activating

  1.  Keep the left shift paddle pulled until SPRINT is displayed in the instrument clus-ter.
  2. The transmission shifts down to the lowest possible gear and switches to manual operation M.
  3. A dynamic setting has been activated for the drivetrain.
  4.  Change gears manually.

Automatic deactivation
The Sprint function is ended automatically when driving moderately for a defined period of time.

Manual deactivation

  • Keep the right shift paddle pulled until SPRINT is no longer displayed in the instrument cluster.
  •  In addition to the pulled right shift paddle, pull the left shift paddle.
  •  Press the selector lever from selector lever position S to D.

Driving Dynamics Control

Principle
The Driving Dynamics Control influences, among other things, the vehicle’s driving dynamics. The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the situation using various driving modes.

General information
The following systems may be affected, for in-stance:

  •  Drivetrain.
  •  Chassis.
  •  Steering.
  •  Display in the instrument cluster.
  •  Cruise control.

Overview
Buttons in the vehicleMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-fig-14

Button Driving mode

  • SPORT
    SPORT PLUS SPORT INDIVIDUAL
  • COMFORT
  • ECO PRO
    ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL

Displays in the instrument cluster

The selected driving mode is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Activating/deactivating drive modes
Press the button for the desired drive mode repeatedly until the desired drive mode is dis-played in the instrument cluster. When changing the drive mode, the current drive mode is deactivated.

Driving modes in detail
COMFORT
The COMFORT driving mode is a balanced setting between sporty and consumption-opti-mized driving.

SPORT
The SPORT driving mode is a dynamic setting for more agility with an optimized suspension.

SPORT PLUS
The SPORT PLUS driving mode is a dynamic setting for maximum agility with an adjusted drive.

ECO PRO
In ECO PRO driving mode, consumption is optimized.

INDIVIDUAL configuration
General information
For some driving modes, there is another mode that can be adjusted individually.
The individual configuration set last is activated directly when the driving mode is called up again.

Configuring and resetting
E.g., ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL drive mode:

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Driving settings”
  4.  “Drivetrain and chassis”
  5.  “ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL”
  6.  Select the desired setting.

Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard settings: “Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD”

Enabling INDIVIDUAL
Press the button for the desired driving mode several times.

Parking brake

Principle
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle from rolling away when it is parked.

Safety information

Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling away. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

  •  Set the parking brake.
  •  On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
  •  On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

  •  Pressing the Start/Stop button.
  •  Releasing the parking brake.
  •  Opening and closing the doors or win-dows.
  •  Engaging selector lever position N.
  •  Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview
Button in the vehicleMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-fig-16

Parking brake

Setting the parking brake With a stationary vehicle

  • Pull the switch.
    The LED lights up.
  • The indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates red.
    The parking brake is set.

While driving
Use while driving serves as an emergency braking function.

  • Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is being pulled.
  • The indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds, and the brake lights illuminate.

A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking brake is engaged when the vehicle is stationary.

Releasing the parking brake Releasing the parking brake manually

  1.  Turn on drive-ready state.
  2. Press the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P is set. The LED and the indicator light go out. The parking brake is released.

Releasing the parking brake automatically
The parking brake is released automatically when you drive off. The LED and the indicator light go out.

Malfunction
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, se-cure the vehicle so that it does not roll away before you exit. A Check Control message is displayed. Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in-stance with a wheel chock, after getting out of the vehicle.

After a power interruption
To reestablish parking brake operability after a power interruption, an initialization may be required.

  1.  Turn on standby state.
  2.  Pull the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P is set and then push.This process may take a few seconds. Some mechanical sounds associated with this proc-ess are normal.
  3. The indicator light is no longer illuminated as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation again.

Automatic Hold

Principle
Automatic Hold assists the driver by automatically setting and releasing the brake, such as when moving in stop-and-go traffic. The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is stationary On uphill grades the system prevents the vehicle from rolling back when driving off.

General information
The parking brake is automatically engaged under the following conditions:

  •  Drive-ready state is switched off.
  •  The driver’s door is opened while the vehicle is stationary.
  •  The moving vehicle is brought to a stand-still using the parking brake.

Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling away. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

  • Set the parking brake.
  • On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
  • On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

  •  Pressing the Start/Stop button.
  •  Releasing the parking brake.
  •  Opening and closing the doors or windows.
  •  Engaging selector lever position N.
  •  Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

NOTICE
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold engages the parking brake and prevents the vehicle from rolling in a car wash. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Deactivate Automatic Hold prior to entering the car wash.

Overview
Button in the vehicleMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-fig-14

Activating Automatic Hold

  1.  Turn on drive-ready state.
  2.  Press the button. The LED lights up.
  3. The indicator light lights up green. Automatic Hold is activated. After every vehicle restart, the last selected setting is active.
  4. Automatic Hold holding the vehicle Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s door is closed.
  5. After stopping, the vehicle is automat-ically secured against rolling away as soon as the indicator light illuminates green.

Driving off
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off. The brake is released automatically and the indicator light of the parking brake is no longer illuminated.

Automatic parking brake application
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-ready state is switched off while the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle is exited.

The indicator light changes from green to red.

Deactivate Automatic Hold

  • Press the button.
  • The LED goes out.
  • The indicator light goes out.

Automatic Hold is switched off.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, also press on the brake pedal when switching off.

Turn signal

Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in the exterior mirrors so that the turn signal lamps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.

BlinkingMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-fig-17

Press the lever past the resistance point.

Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down. The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Exterior lighting”
  4.  If necessary, “Additional settings”
  5.  “One-touch turn signal”
  6.  Select the desired setting.

Brief blinking
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

High beams, headlight flasher

Press the lever forward or pull it backward.MW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-fig-18

  • High beams on, arrow 1.
  • The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on.
  •  High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the high beams are turned on.

Window wiper system

Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded-away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE
The wiper blades can wear out or become damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry window for a longer period of time. The wiper motor can overheat. There is a risk of dam-age to property, among other potential dam-age. Do not use the wipers when the window is dry.

NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Turning on window wiper systemMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-fig-19

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached.

  •  Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
  •  Rain sensor, position 1.
  •  Normal wiper speed, position 2.
  •  Fast wiper speed, position 3.

When the journey is interrupted with the win-dow wiper system turned on: when the journey continues, the wipers resume at their previous speed.

Turning off the window wiper system and flick wipeMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-fig-20

Press the lever down.

  •  Turning off: press the lever down until it reaches the 0 position.
  •  Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0 position.
  • he lever automatically returns to its 0 position when released.

Rain sensor
Principle
The rain sensor automatically controls the wiper operation depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-rectly in front of the interior mirror.

Safety information

NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in car washes. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes.

Activating rain sensorMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-fig-21

Press lever up once from the 0 position, ar-row 1.

Wiping operation is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not start.

Deactivating rain sensor
Press lever back into the 0 position. Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivityMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-fig-22

Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor. Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity. Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.

Windshield washer system Safety information

Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.

NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the washer pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshieldMW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-fig-23

Pull the lever.
The washer fluid is sprayed on the windshield, and the wipers are turned on briefly. Fold-out position of the wipers

Principle
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be folded out from the windshield, which is important, for instance, when changing the wiper

Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded-away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding out the wipers

  1.  Turn on standby state.
  2.  Press and hold the wiper lever down until the wipers stop in a nearly vertical position.MW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-fig-24
  3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the windshield.MW-2-SERIES-COUPE-2023-Driving-fig-25

Folding in the wipers

  1.  Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield.
  2.  Switch on standby state and press and hold the wiper lever down again. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

BMW Top Accessories

[amalinkspro_table id=”32446″ new-window=”on” nofollow=”on” addtocart=”off” /]

Reference Links:

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 User Manual
https://www.bmwusa.com/owners-manuals.html

Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

2023 BMW 2 SERIES COUPE Transporting children safely User Manual

BMW-Logo

2023 BMW 2 SERIES COUPE Transporting children safely

BMW-2-Series-2023

2023 BMW 2 SERIES COUPE Transporting children safely

When it comes to traveling with your family, the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe is not only a stylish and fast car, but it also has safety features to keep your kids safe. The 2 Series Coupe puts the safety of children first, from its well-designed back seats with LATCH mounts for child seats to its many other child safety features. This sleek coupe makes it easy to fit different kinds of child seats, such as infant seats, convertible seats, and booster seats, giving parents and guardians peace of mind. The 2 Series Coupe is made with careful attention to detail so that it can fit different seating positions and weight ranges while still meeting safety standards and rules. With built-in child door locks and airbags that change depending on how many people are in the car, this car is not only fun to drive but also keeps the youngest riders safe. When families go on trips together, the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe makes sure that the safety and comfort of every precious passenger is the top concern.

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equip-ment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

The right place for children

Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

  •  Pressing the Start/Stop button.
  •  Releasing the parking brake.
  • Opening and closing the doors or win-dows.
  •  Engaging selector lever position N.
  •  Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Warning
A hot vehicle may result in death to persons, especially children, or animals. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave persons, especially children, or animals unat-tended in the vehicle.

Warning
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child restraint systems and their components to become very hot. Persons may sustain burn injuries when touching the hot components. There is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight or cover where necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint system cool down before transporting a child. Do not leave children un-attended in the vehicle.

Children in the rear seat

General information
Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the rear seat. Children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-tems designed for the age, weight and size of the child. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight, or size.

Safety information

Warning
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without suitable additional child restraint systems. The protective effect of safety gear, including seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-ries, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.

Children on the front passenger seat

General information
Before using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and side airbags on the passenger’s side are deactivated.
Additional information: For automatic deactivation of front passenger airbags, refer to page 156.

Safety information

Warning
Active front passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the air-bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.

Installing child restraint systems

General information
Pay attention to the specifications and the op-erating and safety information of the child re-straint system manufacturer when selecting, installing, and using child restraint systems.

Warning
The protective effect of child restraint sys-tems and their fastening systems which have been damaged or exposed to an accident can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-erly restrained in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.Do not use child restraint systems which have been damaged or exposed to an acci-dent. If a child restraint system and its fastening system has been damaged or exposed to an accident, have these systems checked and replaced by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat setting or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

On the front passenger seat Deactivating the airbags

Warning
Active front passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the air-bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.Before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the passenger’s side are deactivated.
Additional information: For automatic deactivation of front passenger airbags, refer to page 156.

Seat position and height
After installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go and, if possible, bring it up to the highest position. This seat position and height ensure the best possible position for the belt and of-fers optimal protection in the event of an acci-dent. After mounting a universal child restraint sys-tem, adjust the tilt of the seat backrest so that the belt is not constrained. If the upper attachment point of the seat belt is located in front of the belt guide of the child restraint seat, move the front passenger seat carefully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached.

Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: Before installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, open the backrest width completely. Do not change the backrest width again and do not call up a memory position.

Child seat security

The seat belts in the rear and the front pas-senger seat belt can be permanently locked to fasten child restraint systems.

Locking the seat belt

  1.  Pull out the belt strap completely.
  2.  Secure the child restraint system with the seat belt.
  3.  Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system. The seat belt is disabled.

Unlocking the seat belt

  1.  Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.
  2.  Remove the child restraint system.
  3.  Allow the belt strap to be pulled in completely.

LATCH child restraint fixing system

General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children. Pay attention to the specifications, operating tips and safety instructions from the child re-straint system manufacturer when selecting, installing, and using LATCH child restraint fix-ing systems.

Mounts for lower anchors
General information
The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Safety information

Warning
If the lower mountings of the child restraint system are not correctly engaged, the protective effect of the child restraint system is lim-ited. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that the lower mountings are correctly engaged and that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest.

Warning
The mounts for the lower mountings and at-tachment points of the child restraint system are intended for attaching child restraint sys-tems only. If other objects are attached, the mounts or attachment points can be dam-aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-age to property. Only attach child restraint systems at the corresponding mounts for the lower mountings or attachment points.

Icon Meaning

The corresponding icon shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors. Seats equipped with lower mountings are marked with a pair (2) of LATCH icons. For vehicles equipped with a middle seat: It is not recommended to use the inner lower mountings of standard outer LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle seat belt in-stead for the middle seat.

Before attaching child restraint systems
Pull the seat belt away from the area of the child seat mountings.

Installing child restraint systems

  1.  Mount child restraint system, see manufacturer’s information.
  2.  Make sure that the child restraint system mount is correctly engaged in the lower anchor on both sides.

Child restraint systems with tether strap

Warning
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system, the protective effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes the upper anchor.

Warning
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the protective effect of the child restraint system is limited or nonexistant. In certain situations, for instance braking maneuvers or in case of an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests are locked.

Warning
The mounts for the lower mountings and at-tachment points of the child restraint system are intended for attaching child restraint sys-tems only. If other objects are attached, the mounts or attachment points can be dam-aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-age to property. Only attach child restraint systems at the corresponding mounts for the lower mountings or attachment points.

Attachment points for upper retaining strap

Icon Meaning

The respective icon shows the attachment point for the upper retaining strap. Seats with an upper top tether are marked with this icon. It is located on the rear seat backrest, the rear shelf or the rear seat.

Routing the retaining strap

  1.  Driving direction
  2.  Head restraint
  3. Hook for upper retaining strap
  4.  Attachment point
  5.  Rear shelf
  6.  Seat backrest
  7.  Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the attachment point

  1.  Open the attachment point cover.
  2.  If necessary, raise the head restraint.
  3.  Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports of the head restraint.
  4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the attachment point.
  5.  Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.

FAQ

Q: Can the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe accommodate child seats?

A: Yes, the 2023 BMW 2 Series Coupe is typically equipped with rear seats that can accommodate child seats.

Q: What are the child safety seat options for the 2 Series Coupe?

A: The 2023 2 Series Coupe can usually accommodate various types of child safety seats, including infant seats, convertible seats, and booster seats.

Q: Are the rear seats equipped with LATCH anchors for child seats?

A: Yes, the 2023 2 Series Coupe typically features LATCH anchors that make it easier to secure child seats.

Q: How many child seats can the 2 Series Coupe accommodate?

A: The number of child seats that the 2 Series Coupe can accommodate depends on the specific type and configuration of the child seats.

Q: Is there a recommended seating position for child seats in the 2 Series Coupe?

A: The rear seats of the 2 Series Coupe usually offer suitable positions for securing child seats while ensuring safety and proper installation.

Q: Does the 2 Series Coupe have built-in child safety features?

A: The 2023 2 Series Coupe may include features like child door locks and window controls to enhance child safety.

Q: Are there airbags that can be deactivated for child seats?

A: Depending on the model and location of child seats, some airbags in the 2 Series Coupe may be able to be deactivated to prevent potential injury.

Q: What is the minimum age and weight for using child seats in the 2 Series Coupe?

A: The minimum age and weight for child seats depend on the specific regulations and recommendations in your region.

Q: Can the 2 Series Coupe accommodate rear-facing child seats?

A: Yes, the 2023 2 Series Coupe can generally accommodate rear-facing child seats in the rear seats.

Q: Are there additional child safety accessories available for the 2 Series Coupe?

A: BMW offers various accessories like sunshades, window blinds, and seat protectors that can enhance child safety and comfort.

Q: Can child seats be secured in the front passenger seat of the 2 Series Coupe?

A: While some child seats can be secured in the front passenger seat, it’s generally safer to install them in the rear seats, away from airbags.

Q: Can the 2 Series Coupe’s safety systems be adjusted for child passenger safety?

A: Some advanced safety systems, such as adaptive airbags, may adjust their deployment based on the presence and size of passengers, including children.

Q: Can child seats be installed using the vehicle’s safety belts?

A: Yes, child seats can often be secured using the vehicle’s safety belts if they are properly designed for this method.

Q: Does the 2 Series Coupe have a child lock feature for rear doors?

A: Yes, the 2023 2 Series Coupe usually includes child door locks that prevent children from opening rear doors from the inside.

Q: Is the 2 Series Coupe designed to accommodate booster seats?

A: Yes, the rear seats of the 2 Series Coupe can generally accommodate booster seats to ensure the safety of older children.

Useful Link

 

View Full PDF:  BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 User Manual | Autouser Guide
BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Lights User Manual

Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel User Manual

BMW-Logo

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

BMW-2-Series-2023

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equip-ment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Sitting safely
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of the occupants can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the event of an accident, the correct seat position plays an important role. Follow the in-formation in the following chapters.
Additional information:

  •  Seats, refer to page 92.
  •  Seat belts, refer to page 97.
  •  Head restraints, refer to page 99.
  •  Airbags, refer to page 154.

Seats

Warning
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only adjust the seat on the driver’s side when the vehicle is stationary.

Warning
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the protective effect of the seat belt can no longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding under the seat belt in an accident. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the most upright position as possible and do not adjust again while driv-ing.

Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the travel path of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Manually adjustable seats OverviewBMW-2-Series-2023-1

The levers for setting the seats are located on the front seats.

Setting the longitudinal direction

Warning
Unexpected movements of the seat while driving may occur if the seat is unlocked. Ve-hicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. After adjusting, move the seat for-ward or back slightly, making sure the seat engages properly.BMW-2-Series-2023-2

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction.

Adjusting seat tiltBMW-2-Series-2023-3

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as needed until the seat has reached the desired inclination.

Adjusting the heightBMW-2-Series-2023-4

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as needed until the seat has reached the desired height.

Adjusting backrest tiltBMW-2-Series-2023-5

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Electrically adjustable seats

General information
The current seat position can be stored using the memory function.

OverviewBMW-2-Series-2023-6

The switches for setting the seats are located on the front seats.

Setting the longitudinal directionBMW-2-Series-2023-7

Press switch forward or backward.

Adjusting the heightBMW-2-Series-2023-8

Press switch up or down.

Adjusting seat tiltBMW-2-Series-2023-9

Tilt switch up or down.

Adjusting backrest tiltBMW-2-Series-2023-10

Tilt switch forward or backward.

Adjusting the seat position automatically

General information
The seat setting for the driver’s seat is stored in the active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated at a later time, the saved position will be called up automatically.
Activate/deactivate the function

  1. . “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Seat comfort”
  4.  Select driver’s seat.
  5. . Select the desired setting.

Thigh support Sport seatBMW-2-Series-2023-11

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push the thigh support forward or back.

Lumbar support
Principle
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright sitting position.

Adjusting the lumbar support

  • Press the front/rear section of the button:
    The curvature is increased/de-creased.
  • Press the upper/lower section of the but-ton:
    The curvature is shifted up/down.

Backrest width
Principle
Adjusting the backrest width may improve side support when cornering.

General information
The backrest width is changed by adjusting the side sections of the backrest.

Adjusting the backrest width

  • Press the front section of the but-ton:
    The backrest width decreases.
  • Press the rear section of the button: The backrest width increases.

Entering the rear Safety information

Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the travel path of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Warning
Unexpected movements of the rear seat backrest while driving may occur if the rear seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of injury. Fold back and lock the backrests before driving. Make sure the backrest engages correctly by slightly moving forward and back.

Manual longitudinal setting

  1. Fold the seat backrest forward 1. Pull lever up to the stop.BMW-2-Series-2023-12
  2.  Fold the seat backrest forward.
  3.  Push the seat forward.

Push the seat backrest rearward

  1.  Push the seat back into the initial position.
  2.  Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.

Electric longitudinal setting

Fold the seat backrest forwar

1. Pull lever up to the stop.BMW-2-Series-2023-13

2. Fold the seat backrest forward. To make the entry to the rear easier, the seat will automatically move to the most forward position. The process will be terminated when the switch for the forward/back direction adjust-ment is pressed or the backrest is reclined.

Push the seat backrest rearward
Push the seat backrest rearward and lock it. The seat moves automatically to the last seat position that was stored.

Calibrating the front seats
General information
As soon as the electric seat setting no longer functions precisely, a Check Control message is displayed on the control display. To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-ting, the front seats must be calibrated.

Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the travel path of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Calibrating the front seat

  1.  Press the longitudinal direction switch for-ward until the seat stops.
  2.  Press the switch forward again until the seat stops.
  3.  Readjust the seat to the desired position. As soon as the message on the control dis-play disappears, the calibration is complete. If the message remains active, repeat the calibration. If the message is still shown after repeated calibration, have the system checked by a qualified authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Seat belts

General information
The vehicle is fitted with four seat belts to en-sure occupant safety. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted correctly. Always make sure that seat belts are being worn by the occupants before driving off. The airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-ditional safety device. The airbags do not re-place seat belts. All seat belt anchorage points are designed to achieve the best possible protective effect for the seat belts when used properly and with the correct seat settings.
Additional information:
Notes on sitting safely, refer to page 92.

Warning
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one person will potentially defeat the ability of the seat belt to serve its protective function. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not strap in more than one person per single seat belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an occupant’s lap, but must be transported and secured in designated child restraint systems.

Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-ries, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.

Warning
With a rear seat backrest that is not locked, the protective effect of the middle seat belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. If you are using the middle seat belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.

Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including seat belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the following situations:

  •  The seat belts or seat belt buckles are damaged, soiled, or changed in any other way.
  •  Seat belt tensioners or roll-up mecha-nism were modified.

Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not modify seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat belt ten-sioners, roll-up mechanisms, or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have the seat belts checked after an accident at the authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct use of seat belts

  • Wear the seat belt tight to your body over your lap and shoulders, without twisting it. Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over your lap.
  • The seat belt must not press on your stomach.
  •  Do not rub the seat belt against sharp edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or fragile objects.
  •  Avoid thick clothing.
  •  Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward around your upper body area.

Buckling the seat belt

  1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder and hip to put it on.
  2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage audibly.BMW-2-Series-2023-14

To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an adjustable slider is available on the belt to help position the buckle when not in use.

Unbuckling the seat belt

  1.  Hold down the seat belt firmly.
  2.  Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.
  3.  Guide the seat belt back into its roll-up mechanism.

Seat belt reminder General information

Make sure that the seat belts are positioned correctly. The seat belt reminder becomes active in the following situations:

  •  When the seat belt on the driver’s side or on the passenger’s side is not fastened.
  •  When the seat belt is unfastened while driving.
  •  When objects are lying on a seat.

Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates after turning on the drive-ready state when the seat belt reminder is active. A Check Control message is displayed where applicable. Check whether the seat belt has been fastened correctly.

Icon         Meaning

  • Seat belt on the driver’s seat is not buckled.
  • Seat belt on the passenger seat or another seat in the ve-hicle is not buckled.
  • Seat belt is buckled on the cor-responding seat.
  • Seat belt is not buckled on the corresponding seat.

Rear seat reminder system
Principle
At the end of a trip, the system informs the driver of the possible presence of occupants on the rear seats.

General information
If a door with access to the rear row seating is operated within 30 minutes before starting off, a message appears on the control display when the trip is completed and a signal tone sounds. If the trip is continued within 30 minutes, the message is displayed again after the trip has been completed.

Activate/deactivate the function

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “System settings”
  3.  Rear seat reminder system
  4.  Select the desired setting.

Front head restraints

Warning
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

  •  Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.
  •  Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.
  •  Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

  •  Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
  •  Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.
  •  Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.
  •  Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the heightBMW-2-Series-2023-15

  •  To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.
  •  To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.
Adjusting the height: M sport seatBMW-2-Series-2023-16

Press switch up or down.

Adjusting the distanceBMW-2-Series-2023-17

  •  Back: press the button and push the head restraint toward the rear.
  •  Forward: pull the head restraint toward the front.

After setting the distance, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Adjusting the distance: M Sport seat
The distance to the back of the head is ad-justed via the backrest inclination. Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head.

Removing the head restraints
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.BMW-2-Series-2023-18

  1.  Raise the head restraint up against the re-sistance.
  2.  Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Removing the head restraints: M Sport seat
The head restraints cannot be removed.

Installing head restraints
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint. Rear head restraints

Warning
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-straints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

  •  Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.
  •  Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.
  •  Adjust the distance so that the head re-straint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-tective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

  •  Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
  •  Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.
  •  Only use accessories that have been de-termined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.
  •  Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving.

Folding down the head restraints
General information
To improve the view to the rear, the head re-straints can be folded back. Only fold the head restraint back if no one will be sitting in the corresponding seat.
Folding down the head restraintsBMW-2-Series-2023-19

  •  To the rear: press the button, arrow 1, and fold the head restraint backward.
  •  Forward: fold the head restraint toward the front as far as it will go. Make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Adjusting the heightBMW-2-Series-2023-20

The height of the head restraints can be adjusted.

  •  To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.
  •  To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Removing the head restraint
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

  1.  Fold down the rear seat backrest in question. Enlarging the cargo area, refer to page 242.
  2.  Raise the head restraint up against the resistance.
  3.  Insert the integrated key. Integrated key, refer to page 68.BMW-2-Series-2023-21
  4. Press and hold the integrated key and the button at the same time, arrows 1, and pull out the head restraint completely.BMW-2-Series-2023-22

Installing head restraints

For installation, insert the head restraints in the mounts and slide them down until you feel resistance. After the installation, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Exterior mirrors

General information
The front passenger’s side exterior mirror is more curved than the driver’s side mirror. The exterior mirror adjustment is stored in the active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated at a later time, the stored position is called up automatically. The current exterior mirror adjustment can be stored using the memory function.

Warning
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. The distance to the road users behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in-stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to the traf-fic behind by looking over your shoulder.

OverviewBMW-2-Series-2023-23

Icon Meaning

  • Fold the exterior mirror in and out.
  • Adjust the exterior mirrors.
  • Select mirror, Automatic Curb Moni-tor.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

  • Press the button.
    The selected exterior mirror moves along with the button movement.

Selecting the exterior mirror

  • To change over to the other mirror: Slide the switch.

Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the exterior mirror by pressing on the edges of the mirror glass.

Folding in/folding out the exterior mirrors

NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle can be damaged in car washes. There is a risk of damage to property, among other po-tential damage. Before washing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.

  • Press the button.

Folding is possible up to a speed of approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is help-ful in the following situations:

  •  In car washes.
  •  On narrow roads.

Exterior mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as needed and when the drive-ready state is switched on.

Automatic dimming
The exterior mirror on the driver’s side is au-tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior mirror are used to control this.

Automatic Curb Monitor
Principle
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the passenger’s side is tilted downward. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.

Activating the Automatic Curb Monitor

  1. slide the switch to the driver’s side mirror position.
  2.  Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating the Automatic Curb Monitor
Slide the switch to the front passenger’s side exterior mirror position.

Interior mirror, manually dimmableBMW-2-Series-2023-24

To reduce the blinding glare of the interior mir ror, flip the lever forward. Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature

General information
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically. Photocells are used for control:

  •  In the mirror glass.
  •  On the rear of the mirror.

Functional requirements

  •  Keep the photocells clean.
  •  Do not cover the area between the interior mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel

Safety information

Warning
Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary only.

Manual steering wheel adjustmentBMW-2-Series-2023-26

  1.  Fold the lever down completely.
  2.  Grip the steering wheel with both hands and move the steering wheel to the prefer-red height and angle to suit your seat posi-tion.
  3.  Fold the lever back up.

Steering wheel heating OverviewBMW-2-Series-2023-27

Button for steering wheel heating
Turning the steering wheel heating on/off
Press the button.

A Check Control message is displayed.
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes after an intermediate stop, the steering wheel heating turns on automatically if the function was turned on at the completion of the last trip.

Memory function

  1. The following settings can be stored and, if necessary, retrieved using the memory function:
    •  Seat position.
    •  Exterior mirror adjustment.
    •  Depending on the equipment: height of the Head-up display.

General information

Two memory locations with different settings can be set for each driver profile.
The following settings are not stored:

  •  Backrest width.
  •  Lumbar support.

Warning
Using the memory function while driving can lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the memory function when the vehicle is station-ary.

Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the travel path of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

OverviewBMW-2-Series-2023-27

The memory buttons are located on the front doors.

Storing settings

  1.  Set the desired position.
  2.  Press the button. The LED lights up.
  3.  Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is lit. A signal sounds.

Calling up settings
Press the desired button 1 or 2. The stored position is called up.the procedure stops when a seat setting switch or one of the memory buttons is pressed again. The adjustment of the seat position on the driver’s side is interrupted after a short time while driving.

Seat climate control

Various climate control functions are available for the seats.
Additional information: Climate operation, refer to page 218.

BMW Top Accessories

[amalinkspro_table id=”32446″ new-window=”on” nofollow=”on” addtocart=”off” /]

Refrence Links:

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 User Manual
\https://www.bmwusa.com/owners-manuals.html

Categories
2 Series Coupe BMW

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Opening and closing User Manual

BMW-Logo

BMW 2 SERIES COUPE 2023 Opening and closing

BMW-2-Series-2023

Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems and functions that are available now and will be available in the future, even if they are not available in the owned vehicle.

Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to (page 8.)

Vehicle key

General information
Two vehicle keys are included in the scope of delivery, each containing an integrated key. Each vehicle key contains a replaceable batteryDepending on the equipment and national-market version, various settings are possible for the button functions. A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set-tings can be assigned to a vehicle key. To provide information on maintenance recommendations, the service data is stored in the vehicle key.
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning
The vehicle key has a button cell battery. Batteries or button cell batteries can be swallowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries within two hours, for example due to internal burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key and batteries out of reach of children. Immediately seek medical help if there is any suspicion that a battery or button cell battery has been swallowed or is located in any part of the body.

Overview

Buttons on the vehicle key.

Icon      Meaning

  • Unlock.
  • Lock. Remote Engine Start, refer to (page 227.)
  • Unlock the trunk.
  • Panic mode.
    Pathway lighting, refer to (page 149.)

Additional vehicle keys

Additional vehicle keys are available from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Loss of vehicle keys
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-placed by an authorized service center or an-other qualified service center or repair shop. If the lost vehicle key has an assigned BMW ID or driver profile, the connection to this vehicle key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver pro-file.

Replacing the battery

NOTICE
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-vice can damage the device. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Always replace the discharged bat-tery with a battery with the same voltage, the same size and the same specification.

  1.  Remove the integrated key from the vehicle key.
  2.  Place the integrated key underneath the battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the lid with a lever movement of the integrated key, arrow 2.
  3. Push battery in arrow direction using a pointed object and lift it out.
  4.  Insert a CR2032 3V battery with the positive side facing up.
  5.  Press the lid closed.
  6.  Push the integrated key into the vehicle key until the integrated key engages. Have old batteries disposed of by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point.

Integrated key

General information

The vehicle can be unlocked without the vehicle key using the integrated key. Depending on the national-market version, the integrated key will fit in the glove compartment.

Safety information

Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-ing from the inside is only possible with particular knowledge. If persons spend a lengthy time in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to extreme temperatures, there is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

Removing the integrated key

  1. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the integrated key, arrow 2.
  2. Pull off frame from integrated key.

Unlocking via the door lock

  1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with one hand.
  2. Unlock the door lock with the integrated key by turning it counterclockwise.

The other doors must be unlocked from the inside.

Locking the vehicle from the interior

General information
The vehicle can be locked manually from the inside. To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the vehicle.

Overview

Door pin for manual locking of the driver’s door.

Locking the vehicle

  1.  Close the driver’s door.
  2.  Press the door pin in the driver’s door downwards from the inside.
  3.  Lock rear doors from the inside.
  4.  Open the front passenger door and lock it manually.
  5.  Close the front passenger door from the outside.

Alarm system
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-tem will be triggered when the door is opened. In this case, use the vehicle key emergency detection to switch off the alarm. If the doors are manually locked from the in-side, the alarm system is not activated.

Emergency detection of the vehicle key

It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready state if the vehicle key has not been detected. Proceed as follows in this case:

  1.  Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the mark on the steering column. Pay attention to the display in the instrument cluster.
  2.  If the vehicle key is detected:
    • Turn on drive-ready state within 10 seconds.
    • If the vehicle key is not detected: Slightly change the position of the vehicle key and repeat the procedure.

Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed where applicable. Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-function under the following circumstances:

  •  The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
  •  Fault of the radio link from transmission towers or other equipment with high trans-mitting power.
  •  Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects.
  • Do not transport the vehicle key together with metal objects.
  •  Fault of the radio link from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehicle key.
  • Do not carry the vehicle key in close proximity to other electronic devices.
  •  Fault of radio transmission by a charging process of mobile devices, for instance charging of a mobile phone.
  •  The vehicle key is located in direct proximity of the wireless charging tray.
  • Place the vehicle key in a different location.
  • In the case of interference, the vehicle can also be unlocked and locked from the outside with the integrated key. Use the Emergency detection of the vehicle key to turn on drive read-ness.

Access to vehicle interior

Safety information

Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside.

Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-ing from the inside is only possible with par-ticular knowledge. If persons spend a lengthy time in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to extreme temperatures, there is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

  •  Pressing the Start/Stop button.
  •  Releasing the parking brake.
  •  Opening and closing the doors or windows.
  •  Engaging selector lever position N.
  •  Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Actions during unlocking

Depending on the settings, the following functions are performed when unlocking the vehicle:

  • Only the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap will be unlocked or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked.
  • The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.
  • The welcome light can be turned on when the vehicle is being unlocked.
  • In addition, the following functions are executed:
  •  If a BMW ID or a driver profile was assigned to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver profile will be activated.
  •  The interior lights are switched on, unless they were manually switched off.
  •  Depending on vehicle equipment, folded-in exterior mirrors are folded out.
  • If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the button in the vehicle interior, they will not be folded out during unlocking.
  •  Anti-theft protection is switched off.
  •  The alarm system is switched off. Additional information:
  •  Settings, refer to (page 82).
  • Welcome lights, refer to (page 149).
  •  BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to (page 62).

Actions during locking
Depending on the settings, the following functions are performed when unlocking the vehicle:

  • The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed with a light signal or a sound signal. Depending on vehicle equipment, the exterior mirrors can be folded in automatically when locking. The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the hazard warning flashers are switched on.
  • Pathway lighting can be activated during locking.

The following functions are executed:

  •  All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are locked.
  •  Anti-theft protection is switched on. This prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or the door openers.
  •  The alarm system is switched on.
  • If the drive readiness is still turned on when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.
    Additional information: Settings, refer to (page 82.)

With the vehicle key Unlocking the vehicle

Press the button on the vehicle key. If only the driver’s door and fuel filler flap have been unlocked due to the settings, press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points. After opening one of the front doors, the vehicle is ready for operation. The lighting functions may depend on the ambient brightness.

Locking the vehicle

  1.  Close the driver’s door.
  2.  Press the button on the vehicle key.

On the external door handle

Principle
The vehicle can be accessed without operating the vehicle key. The vehicle key is automatically detected near the vehicle.

General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.

Functional requirements

  •  Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket.
  •  To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be outside of the vehicle near the doors.
  •  After locking, approx. 2 seconds must elapse before unlocking is possible.

Unlock vehicle

Reach into the recessed grip of a front door.

Locking the vehicle

  1.  Close the driver’s door.
  2.  Touch the grooved surface on the external door handle of a closed door with your fin-ger for approx. 1 second without reaching into the recessed grip.

Malfunction

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-ing request detection on the external door handles. In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key or use the integrated key. Touchless unlocking/locking of the vehicle

Principle
When the driver approaches the locked vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked. When the driver walks away from the unlocked vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be locked.

General information
The function is available with Comfort Access. The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking zone. The unlocking zone is located within a radius of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the side and rear of the vehicle. The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key leaves the locking zone. The locking zone is located within a radius of approx. 9 ft/3 m around the side and rear of the vehicle. If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking zone for an extended period of time without movement, the vehicle will be locked  automatically . If a passenger is detected in the front passenger seat during locking and the seat belt of the front passenger is engaged in the seat belt buckle during locking:

  •  The vehicle will be locked but not secured against theft.
  •  The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Actions during unlocking
If the settings specify that only the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap will be unlocked, note the following: The driver’s door and fuel filler flap will only be unlocked when the driver approaches the vehicle on the driver’s side.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to (page 82.)

Functional requirements

  •  Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket.
  •  Unlocking: when entering the unlocking zone, the doors and cargo area must be closed.
  •  Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the doors and cargo area must be closed.
  •  Automatic unlocking and locking must be activated in the settings.
  •  The drive-ready state must be turned off.
  •  For contactless locking of the vehicle, no second vehicle key may be within a radius of 18 ft/6 m around the vehicle.
  •  If the vehicle has been in the idle state for several days, contactless unlocking/locking will only be available after the vehicle has been driven.

Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 82.

With the Key Card

Principle
The Key Card is a chip card on which the digital key is installed. It can be used to unlock and lock the vehicle.
Additional information:
Key Card, refer to page 77.

General information
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle

Hold activated Key Card directly on the center of the external door handle of the driver’s door. When locking the vehicle with the Key Card, make sure that all doors and the trunk are closed.
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change the position of the Key Card and repeat the procedure.

With the BMW Digital Key

Principle
Depending on the national-market version and equipment, a digital key can be installed on a compatible smartphone and used to unlock and lock the vehicle.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 78. Locking/unlocking the vehicle

Hold the near field communication antenna of the smartphone directly and centered on the external door handle of the driver’s door. The position of the near field communication an-tenna depends on the smartphone model. When locking the vehicle with the smartphone, make sure that all doors and the trunk are closed.

Frequently Asked Questions
What precautions can be taken to be able to open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in the vehicle key?

  •  The Remote Services of the BMW app include the option to lock and unlock a vehicle.
  • This requires an active BMW Connected-Drive contract and the BMW app must be installed on a smartphone.
  •  Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via the BMW Connected Drive Call Center. An active BMW Connected Drive contract is required.

Access to the cargo area

General information
It may not be possible to open the cargo area when the vehicle is in valet parking mode. Additional information: Valet parking mode, refer to page 82.

Safety information

Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is clear during opening and closing.

With the vehicle key

General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, the following settings can be changed:

  •  Whether the doors are also unlocked when unlocking with the vehicle key.
  •  Whether the vehicle must be unlocked be-fore unlocking with the vehicle key.

Unlocking the trunk

Press the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

On the trunk

General information
With Comfort Access, the cargo area can be accessed without activating the vehicle key. The key is automatically detected near the vehicle.

Functional prerequisite
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket.

Opening the trunk

 

  •  Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-ton on the trunk.
  •  With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key with you and press the button on the trunk. Locked doors are not unlocked.

Closing the cargo area

Pull down the cargo area using the recessed grips.

In the interior

Functional requirements
When the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P must be engaged before the trunk lid can be opened using the button in the vehicle interior.

Unlocking the trunk

Press the button in the storage compartment of the driver’s door.

Trunk emergency unlocking

Pull the handle inside the cargo area. The trunk is unlocked.

Key Card

Principle
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked and locked, as well as started.

General information
The availability of the Key Card depends on the equipment and the country. A digital key that has already been paired with the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The digital key must be activated via iDrive.
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key Card or take the Key Card with you because the active Key Card can be used to start the vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to a service appointment.

Safety information

NOTICE
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the wireless charging tray at the same time, the Key Card could become damaged. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not place the Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the same time as a mobile device.

Activating/deactivating Key Card in the vehicle

General information
The Key Card must be located in the smart-phone tray and a vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to activate the Key Card. A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to deactivate the Key Card. When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the vehicle key. A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of paired digital keys.

Activating Key Card

  1.  Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
  2.  Place Key Card in the center of the smart-phone tray.
  3.  Follow instructions on the control display.

Deactivating Key Card

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Doors and windows”
  4.  “Key Card”
  5.  “Deactivate Key Card”

A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of paired digital keys.

Unlocking and locking the vehicle

The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with the activated Key Card.

Additional information:
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 72.Turning on the drive-ready state

  1.  Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
  2.  Place activated Key Card in the center of the smartphone tray.
  3.  Press the Start/Stop button.

After drive readiness is switched on, the Key Card can be removed from the tray.

Malfunction
The detection of the Key Card by the vehicle may be disrupted by objects between the sensors and the Key Card, such as a wallet or a smartphone cover.

BMW Digital Key

Principle
BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un-locked and locked, as well as started, with a compatible smartphone.

General information 
Availability and range of functions of the BMW Digital Key depend on the equipment and national-market version. BMW Digital Key can be used with a compatible smartphone or other compatible mobile devices.
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible smartphone, this function must be offered by the smartphone manufacturer. The BMW app provides a check to determine if the smart-phone and the vehicle are compatible and which functions are supported .A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual settings can be assigned to a digital key. When using a smartphone as a Digital Key, always carry a vehicle key or the activated Key Card with you. This ensures access to the ve-hicle, even in the event of a smartphone fail-ure. It is also helpful to have the vehicle key or Key Card with you if the vehicle needs to be handed over to another person. You can then hand over the vehicle key or the Key Card instead of your smartphone. Always take the vehicle key with you to a service appointment.

Functional requirements

  •  The smartphone is compatible with BMW Digital Key
  •  The vehicle is linked with the Connected-Drive account of the vehicle owner.
  •  The rechargeable battery of the smart-phone has a sufficient charge. The necessary minimum charge of the rechargeable battery depends on the smartphone.

Enabling the digital remote control key
Vehicle owner’s smartphone is enabled as a digital remote control key in the vehicle. The vehicle owner must prove his authorization for the vehicle for this purpose. Proof of authorization can be started via the BMW app or via the activation code in the corresponding smartphone function, e.g. in the Wallet app. Both vehicle keys must be in the vehicle during activation. Follow the instructions in the Digital Key menu in the BMW app or on the Control Display.

Sharing digital keys

General information
Digital key allows the sharing of digital keys with other people. This option is available via the smartphone that is enabled as digital re-mote control key. This function must be sup-ported by the smartphone.

Forwarding authorization
To share the digital key, select the correspond-ing function on the smartphone, for instance in the Wallet app. As soon as a digital key is shared with another person, the person will receive an invitation. When the invitation is accepted, the digital key on the recipient’s smartphone will be activated.

Limiting the range of functions
Certain functions of the digital key can be limited before handing it over. For instance, if the Digital Key is passed on to a novice driver, the switch-off for driving stability control systems can be disabled and the engine power can be reduced. For more information, refer to the Connected Drive portal and the BMW app.

Authentication
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone model, an authentication may be required for security and safety reasons. An authorized vehicle key, the digital remote control key or another method may be used for authentication. Follow the corresponding instructions on the smartphone or the Control Display.

Deleting digital keys

General information
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the list of enabled digital keys. Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.

Deleting the digital master key
The digital master key can be deleted from the smartphone or via iDrive. The deletion of the digital master key is com-pleted immediately.

Deleting a shared key
Shared keys can be deleted via the smart-phone with the digital remote control key, via the smartphone with a shared key or via iDrive. The deletion via the smartphone using the dig-ital remote control will not be performed until the vehicle is used with a key other than the key to be deleted. The deletion via the smartphone with a shared key or via iDrive is executed immediately.

Deletion via iDrive
To be able to delete a digital key via iDrive, an authorized vehicle key must be located in the vehicle or the remote control key must be located in the smartphone tray.

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Doors and windows”
  4.  “Digital Key”
  5.  If necessary, select the digital key.
  6.  Delete the Digital Key.

Resetting the function
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an authorized vehicle key must be located in the vehicle. When resetting the BMW Digital Key function, all digital keys including the digital main key will be deleted. The Key Card digital key is not deleted. After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be unlocked, locked or started with a digital key. The digital remote control key must be enabled again to be able to use BMW Digital Key again.

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Doors and windows”
  4.  “Digital Key”
  5.  “Reset function”

Unlocking and locking the vehicle
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked using the external door handle.

Additional information:
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 72.

Turning on the drive-ready state

Using the smartphone tray

  1.  Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
  2.  Place smartphone in the center of the smartphone tray.
  3. sure that the display is facing up.
  4.  Close the cover of the smartphone tray.
  5.  Press the Start/Stop button to turn on the drive-ready state.

Sale of the smartphone
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior to selling the smartphone. This ensures that the smartphone can no longer be used for the vehicle.

Sale of the vehicle
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital Key function or remove the vehicle from the Connected Drive account of the current vehicle owner. When the vehicle is removed from the Connected Drive account, all digital keys for the vehicle will be deleted. The Key Card digital key is not deleted.

System limits
The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen-sor of the alarm system cannot be switched off with a digital key.

Additional information:
Alarm system, refer to page 84.

Malfunction
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal-function under the following circumstances:

  • The smartphone is shielded from the sensors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover that is not suitable.
  • Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card are located between the smartphone and the smartphone cover.
  •  Fault of the connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high trans-mitting power.
  •  Shielding of the smartphone due to build-ings or metal objects.

Buttons for the central locking system

General information
The vehicle is automatically locked when driv-ing off. In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on.

Overview

The central locking buttons are located on the front door.

  • Lock.
  • Unlock.

Locking the vehicle

  • Press the button with the front doors closed.

The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking.

Unlocking the vehicle

  • Press the button.

Opening the door

  • Press the button to unlock all the doors.
  • Pull the door opener above the arm- rest.
  •  Front doors: pull the door handle on the door to open the door. The other doors re-main locked.
  •  Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on the door to be opened; the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it. The other doors remain locked.

Valet parking mode

Principle
In the valet parking mode, the Control Display is disabled. E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle is handed over for valet parking.

General information
Depending on the national-market version, the valet parking mode may not be available. In the valet parking mode, it is not possible to change vehicle settings via iDrive. Settings stored in a BMW ID or a guest profile can-not be changed. Personal data cannot be dis-played. Additionally, the following actions are carried out:

  • The volume of the audio system is limited. The Dynamic Stability Control cannot be turned off.
  • The availability of certain settings of the driving modes is limited.

Additional information:
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 62.

Functional requirement

The driver has registered in the vehicle with a BMW ID.

Activating the valet parking mode

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “System settings”
  4.  “Valet parking mode” The cargo area is locked and disconnected from the central locking system.
  5.  If necessary, “PIN” If the active BMW ID does not have an as-signed PIN, this PIN must be set now. The PIN is needed to deactivate the valet park-ing mode.
  6.  If necessary, enter the PIN.
  7.  “Activate valet parking mode”

Deactivating valet parking mode

  1.  Select the desired BMW ID on the lock screen.
  2.  Enter the assigned PIN for the BMW ID. If you have forgotten the PIN: enter the access data for the BMW ID.
  3. If the selected BMW ID does not have an assigned PIN: enter the access data for the BMW ID.

Settings

General information
Depending on the equipment and national-market version, various settings for opening and closing are possible.

Unlocking and locking Doors

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Doors and windows”
  4.  “Lock/unlock”
  5.  “Unlock”
  6.  Select the desired setting:
  7.  “Driver’s door only”
  8. Only the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again un-locks the entire vehicle.
  9.  “All doors”
  10. The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Touchless unlocking/locking

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Doors and windows”
  4.  “Comfort access”
  5.  Select the desired setting:
  6. “Unlock when approaching”
  7.  “Lock when walking away”

Automatic unlocking

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Doors and windows”
  4.  “Lock/unlock”
  5.  Select the desired setting:
  6.  “Unlock doors at end of trip”
  7.  “Unlock doors when in P”

After drive readiness is switched off, the locked vehicle is unlocked automatically by pressing the start/stop button or engaging selector lever position P.

Automatic locking

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Doors and windows”
  4.  “Lock/unlock”
  5.  “Lock after a short time”
  6. The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if no door is opened after unlocking.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle

  1. MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Doors and windows”
  4.  “Lock/unlock”
  5.  Deactivate or activate the desired confirmation signals:
    •  “Flash on lock/unlock”
    • Unlocking is signaled by blinking twice, locking by blinking once.
    •  With alarm system:
    • “Sound on lock/unlock”
    • Unlocking is confirmed with two sound signals, locking is confirmed with one sound signal.

Folding mirrors in automatically

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Doors and windows”
  4.  “Lock/unlock”
  5.  “Fold mirrors on lock/unlock”

Cargo area

Cargo area and doors

  1.  “MENU”
  2.  “Vehicle apps”
  3.  “Doors and windows”
  4.  “Tailgate”
  5.  Select the desired setting:
    •  “Tailgate”
      Depending on the equipment, the cargo area will be unlocked or opened.
    •  “Tailgate and door(s)”
      Depending on the equipment, the trunk will be unlocked or opened and the doors are unlocked.
    •  “Tailgate will only open if vehicle is already unlocked”
      The vehicle must be unlocked before the cargo area can be operated with the vehicle key.
    •  “Lock tailgate button”
      Operating the cargo area with the vehicle key is disabled.

Alarm system

Principle
The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic signal when someone attempts to open the locked vehicle incorrectly.

General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes:

  •  Opening a door, the hood, or the cargo area.
  •  Movements in the interior.
  •  Changes in the vehicle inclination, such as during attempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the vehicle.
  •  Disconnected battery voltage.
  •  Improper use of the socket for OBD on- board diagnostics.
  • Locking the vehicle while a device is con-nected to the diagnostic socket.
  • the alarm system signals these changes visu-ally and acoustically:
  •  Acoustic alarm:
    Depending on local regulations, the acous-tic alarm may be suppressed.
  •  Optical alarm:
    By blinking of the hazard warning system and headlights, where required.

Do not modify the system to ensure function of the alarm system.

Turning the alarm system on/off
The alarm system is turned off or on as soon as the vehicle is unlocked or locked.

Opening the doors with the alarm system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is opened if the door was unlocked using the integrated key in the door lock.

Opening the cargo area with the alarm system switched on
The cargo area can be opened even when the alarm system is switched on. After closing the cargo area, the cargo area will be locked and monitored again. The hazard warning system blinks once during closing.

Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.


Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds. Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession. To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Indicator light on the interior mirror

  •  The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 seconds:
  • The alarm system is switched on.
  •  Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:
  • Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are not correctly closed. Correctly closed access points are secured.
  • When the remaining open access points are closed, the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.
    The indicator light goes out after unlocking: The vehicle has not been tampered with.
  •  The indicator light flashes after unlocking until drive-ready state is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been deployed.

Tilt alarm sensor
The inclination of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is towed.

Interior motion sensor
The vehicle interior is monitored. The alarm system responds when movement is detected in the vehicle interior. The windows must be closed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized action occurred. Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:

  •  In car washes.
  •  In duplex garages.
  •  During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at sea or on a trailer.
  •  With animals in the vehicle.
  •  When the vehicle is locked after start of re-fueling.

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor can be switched off in such situations.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
Press the button on the vehicle key within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked. The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 seconds and then continues to flash. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Ending the alarm
Unlock the vehicle. If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated key, the drive readiness must subsequently be turned on via the emergency detection of the vehicle key.

Window

General information
When a window is frequently opened to the same position, this task can be performed by the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. For in-stance when the same parking garage is frequently used.
Additional information: BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to page 51.

Safety information

Warning
When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-jury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the travel path of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

With the vehicle key Opening windows

  • Press and hold the button on the vehicle key after unlocking.

The windows open for as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Closing the windows

With Comfort Access: press and hold the button on the vehicle key after locking.The windows close for as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed. Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior mirrors are folded in unless they were folded in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the hazard warning flashers are switched on.

On the external door handle

Principle
The windows can be closed using the external door handle without operating the vehicle key. The vehicle key is automatically detected near the vehicle.

General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.

Functional prerequisite
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance in your pants pocket.

Closing the windows

Touch the grooved surface on the external door handle of a closed door with your finger and hold it there without grasping the recessed grip. In addition to locking, the windows and glass sunroof with sun protection will be closed. Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior mirrors are folded in unless they were folded in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the hazard warning flashers are switched on.

In the interior Overview

Power windows

Functional requirements
The windows can be operated under the fol-lowing conditions.

  •  Standby state is switched on.
  •  Drive-ready state is switched on.

The vehicle key or a digital key must be inside of the vehicle.

Opening windows

  • Press the switch to the resistance point. The window opens while the switch is being held.
  • Press the switch beyond the resist-ance point. The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Closing the windows

  • Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is being held.
  • Pull the switch beyond the resistance pointThe window closes automatically. Pulling again stops the motion.

Jam protection system

Principle
The jam protection prevents objects or body parts becoming jammed between the door frame and window while a window is being closed.

General information
If resistance or blockage is detected while a window is being closed, the closing will be interrupted.

Safety information

Warning
Accessories on the windows such as antennas can impact jam protection. There is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the area of movement of the windows.

Closing without the jam protection system
In case of danger from the outside or if icing might prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:

  1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there.
    The window closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted.
  2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.
    The window closes without jam protection.

Glass sunroof

Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and closing.

With the vehicle key Opening glass sunroof

  • Press and hold the button on the vehicle key after unlocking.

The glass sunroof with sun protection will be opened for as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Closing glass sun roof

With Comfort Access: press and hold the button on the vehicle key in close range of the vehicle after locking. The glass sunroof with sun protection will be closed for as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior mirrors are folded in unless they were folded in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the hazard warning flashers are switched on.

On the external door handle
Principle
The glass sunroof can be closed using the external door handle without operating the vehicle key. The vehicle key is automatically detected near the vehicle.

General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.

Functional prerequisite
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance in your pants pocket.

Closing glass sunroof

Touch the grooved surface on the external door handle of a closed door with your finger and hold it there without grasping the recessed grip. In addition to locking, the windows and glass sunroof with sun protection will be closed. Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior mirrors are folded in unless they were folded in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the hazard warning flashers are switched on.

In the interior
General information
The glass sunroof and the sun protection are operated using the same switch.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Opening/closing the glass sun-roof/sun protection.

 

Functional requirements

The glass sunroof and sun protection can be operated under the following conditions.

  •  Standby state is switched on.
  •  Drive-ready state is switched on.
  • The vehicle key must be in the car’s interior.

Lifting/closing glass sunroof

Push switch briefly upward.

  •  The closed glass sunroof tilts and the sun protection opens slightly.
  •  The opened glass sunroof closes until it is in the tilted position. The sun protection does not move.
  • The tilted glass sunroof closes.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sun protection separately

Slide switch back to the resistance point and hold. Holding down the switch opens the sun protection. If the sun protection is already fully open, the glass sunroof opens.

  •  Slide switch forward to the resistance point and hold.
  • The glass sunroof closes while the switch is being held. If the glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted position, the sun pro-tection closes.
  •  Slide the switch back past the resistance point.
  • The sun protection opens automatically. If the sun protection is already fully open, the glass sunroof opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
  •  Push the switch forward past the resistance point.
  • The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted position, the sun protection closes automatically.
  • Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sun protection together

  • Briefly press out the switch twice in succession toward the rear past the resistance point.
  • The glass sunroof and sun protection open together. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.<